JP6613598B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, with regard to the pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the entrance part provided in the game area, and the display of the display device displays a variation of the pattern. There is a known configuration in which when a winning result is obtained, a combination of specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and a transition is made to a predetermined gaming state. And when it transfers to a predetermined | prescribed game state, opening and closing of the pitching apparatus provided, for example in the game area | region is started (for example, refer patent document 1).

JP 2009-261415 A

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of games.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 is characterized in that a variable pitching means capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for performing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player, based on the fact that a privilege granting opportunity has occurred due to a game ball entering the variable pitching means;
A predetermined lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on a game ball entering a predetermined pitching portion;
First state setting means for setting the state in which the variable pitch control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a specific result;
Second state setting means for setting the state in which the variable pitch control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result;
With
When the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the specific result, the privilege grant opportunity may occur, or when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the specific result, the result of the predetermined lottery process is It is a configuration in which the privilege grant opportunity is more likely to occur than in the case of a non-specific result,
The predetermined lottery process is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined entrance part during a predetermined effective period , and even if the game ball enters the predetermined entrance part during a period different from the predetermined effective period, The predetermined lottery process is not executed.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of games.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 2nd action | operation part in the case of being a non-induction state, (b) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 2nd action | operation part in the case of an induction state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view for demonstrating the internal structure of a distribution prize-winning apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. (A) It is a time chart which shows the operation | movement aspect of the allocation winning device in 1st distribution execution mode, (B) It is a time chart which shows the operation | movement aspect of the allocation winning device in 2nd distribution execution mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the flow of the game in this pachinko machine, and the display content in a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display apparatus in the prize valid period of the game prize and the through winning part for distribution, and distribution execution mode. (A) It is a time chart which shows the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode generated from the 1st distribution execution mode, (B) It is a time chart which shows the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode generated from the 2nd distribution execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process in display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure change process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution waiting in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution start in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution end process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electricity start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power open | release process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power closing process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power completion | finish process in the main side MPU. (A)-(j) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a game progresses. (A), (B) It is a time chart which shows the operation | movement aspect of the allocation prize-winning apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution waiting performed in the main side MPU in 3rd Embodiment. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the main side ROM in 4th Embodiment, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the classification table, (c) It respond | corresponds to each hit result. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a table group. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution waiting in the main side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the allocation table. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution end process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process in the main side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display apparatus corresponding to the gaming state in which a decision | availability determination process and a distribution determination process are performed using the 2nd high probability table group, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display apparatus corresponding to the gaming state in which a success determination process and a distribution determination process are performed using the low probability table group or the fifth high probability table group. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed in main side MPU in 5th Embodiment. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the winning probability of the success determination process which can be selected in the probability lottery process of a success / failure determination, (b) Of the distribution determination process which can be selected in the probability lottery process of a distribution determination It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a winning probability. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process performed in main side MPU in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st game state transfer process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd game state transfer process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st game state transfer process performed in main side MPU in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd game state transfer process in main side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of hit result in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution in main side MPU.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and may be configured such that the outer frame 11 is provided in the island facility of the game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 16 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 22 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 23 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 23 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 23 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 22 of the resin base 21.

  The structure of the game board 23 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 23.

  An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 23 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 guide the means. As a guide rail, it is configured. A game ball launched from a game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 22 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

  Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying a game ball stored in an upper plate 75a described later onto the launch rail 27a, and the launch rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail. When the firing operation device (or firing handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and a game ball is launched.

  The game board 23 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning portion 31, a first operating portion 32, a second operating portion 33, a special drawing through winning portion 34, a distributing through winning portion 35, a distributing winning device 36, a special electric winning device 37, and a variable. A display unit 41, a special drawing unit 42, a universal drawing unit 43, and the like are provided.

  Even if a ball is thrown into the special drawing through winning section 34 and the distributing through winning section 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, the number of game media that can be used by the player in the case where a winning to any of the general winning unit 31, the first operating unit 32, the second operating unit 33, the distribution winning device 36, and the special electricity winning device 37 occurs. A predetermined number of game balls are paid out in order to increase the value. Specifically, with respect to the number of winning balls, when 10 balls are thrown into the general winning portion 31, 10 game balls are paid out, and when the first operating portion 32 is thrown out. When three game balls are paid out and a ball enters the second operating unit 33, one game ball is paid out and a ball enters the distribution prize device 36 15 game balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the special prize winning device 37, the same 15 game balls are paid out as when a ball is entered into the distribution winning device 36. Is executed.

  As will be described later, the distribution winning device 36 is provided with a discharge passage area 65b and a V winning passage area 65c. The game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 36 are discharged into the discharge passage area 65b and the V winning passage. Although one of the areas 65c will pass through, the same number (specifically, 15) of game balls will be paid out regardless of which of the discharge path area 65b and the V prize path area 65c passes. Is done. The number of prize balls may be arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in the first operating part 32 and the second action part 33 may be the same, and the number of prize balls in the sorting prize winning device 36 is the special electric prize. The configuration may be greater or less than the number of prize balls of the device 37.

  In addition, an out port 23a is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 23, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 23a. Further, the game board 23 is provided with a large number of nails 23b and various members such as a windmill in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode of discharging from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 23a, the general winning part 31, the first operating part 32, the second operating part 33, the special drawing through winning part 34, A game ball entering the distribution through winning unit 35, the distribution winning device 36, and the special electricity winning device 37 is also expressed as winning.

  A variable display unit 41 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Due to the fact that the peripheral portion of the variable display unit 41 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 23, an area where the game ball launched into the game area PA can flow down is defined. Specifically, in the game area PA, an upper area PA1 that is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 41, and a lower area than the variable display unit 41 that is continuous below the upper area PA1. A left area PA2 that is the left area, a right area PA3 that is continuous to the upper area PA1 and below the variable display unit 41, and a left area PA2 and a right area PA3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PA4 which is continuous below and below the variable display unit 41.

  When the player operates the firing operation device 28 with a rotation amount within a first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first launch operation, the game ball is moved to the left of the lateral center position in the upper area PA1. Run down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1, the left area PA2, and the lower area PA4. On the other hand, when the player operates the firing operation device 28 with the rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount as the second firing operation, in the upper area PA1, on the right side of the lateral center position. A game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1, the right area PA3, and the lower area PA4. That is, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2 of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3 by adjusting the amount of rotation operation of the launch operation device 28, and the right area A game can be played so that a game ball flows down on PA3. Incidentally, when the firing operation device 28 is operated with the maximum rotation amount, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1, the right area PA3, and the lower area PA4.

  The 1st operation part 32 is installed in lower field PA4. The first operating part 32 is opened upward, and no member such as an opening / closing member for preventing the game ball from entering the first operating part 32 is provided. In a situation where game balls are being fired in the same manner, the winning probability to the first operating unit 32 is constant without depending on the game state. In other words, the first operating part 32 can always enter a game ball that flows down the game area PA toward the first operating part 32. The first operating unit 32 is a game ball that is disposed directly below the stage 41 a formed in the variable display unit 41 and flows into the stage 41 a through a guide passage formed in the variable display unit 41. The game balls discharged from the center of the stage 41a to the outside of the variable display unit 41 are easy to win the first operating unit 32. The first operating part 32 is provided with a detection sensor 32a, and a game ball won in the first operating part 32 is detected by the detection sensor 32a.

  Here, as described above, the first operating part 32 is provided in the lower area PA4. However, a game that flows down the right area PA3 upstream of the first operating part 32 toward the right area PA3. A restricting nail 23c is provided so that the sphere cannot reach the first operating portion 32. In addition, the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 41a is provided for the left area PA2, and is not provided for the right area PA3. With these configurations, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, the first operating unit 32 can be won, but the game ball flows down the right area PA3. When the firing operation device 28 is operated as described above, the winning to the first operating unit 32 becomes impossible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game balls flow down the right area PA3 because the regulation nail 23c is not provided or the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 41a is provided to the right area PA3. Even when the firing operation device 28 is operated as described above, the first operating unit 32 may be awarded.

  The 2nd operation part 33 is installed in right field PA3. In other words, the second operating unit 33 cannot win when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the shooting operation so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. Winning is possible when the device 28 is being operated.

  The configuration of the second operating unit 33 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4A is a longitudinal sectional view of the second operating part 33 in the non-accepting state. The second operating unit 33 includes a base unit 51 in which a discharge passage 53 for discharging the game ball flowing in from the game area PA to the rear of the game board 23 is formed, and a discharge ball 53 for flowing the game ball flowing down the game area PA. And a guiding unit 52 for guiding to the above. The entrance 53a of the discharge passage 53 has an opening area equal to or greater than that of one game ball, and is open toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. A detection sensor 54 is provided on the outlet 53b side of the discharge passage 53, and the detection sensor 54 detects a game ball that has won the second operating unit 33.

  The guide unit 52 receives a game ball flowing down from the front area of the entrance portion 53a in the game area PA from below, and guides the received game ball into the discharge passage 53, and into the discharge passage 53. The guide drive unit 56 for displacing the guide member 55 between the initial position where the game ball cannot be guided and the guide position where the guidance is enabled, and the guide member 55 are disposed at the initial position In the state where the guide ball 55 is disposed at the guiding position and the guide member 55 is disposed at the guiding position in the state where the inflow of the game ball into the discharge passage 53 is not blocked. And a blocking member 57. The guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction so that the guide member 55 is located below. A transmission unit 58 is provided so as to transmit the driving force of the guide driving unit 56 to the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57.

  When the guide driving unit 56 is in a non-driven state, the guide member 55 is disposed at the initial position and the blocking member 57 is disposed at the blocking position by a biasing force of a biasing means such as a spring (not shown). In this case, the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are entirely buried in the discharge passage 53 and do not protrude into the game area PA. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the area in front of the inlet 53a of the discharge passage 53 in the game area PA is not guided into the discharge passage 53 by the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57, that is, the game ball is second The game area PA flows downward without entering the operating portion 33. Further, since the blocking member 57 is disposed at the blocking position, the substantial opening area of the inlet portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 becomes less than one gaming ball. Thereby, in the situation where the guide member 55 is disposed at the initial position, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from entering the second operating portion 33.

  When the guide driving unit 56 is in the driving state, the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are displaced against the urging force of the urging means, so that the guide member 55 is disposed at the guiding position and the blocking member 57 is not Located in the blocking position. FIG. 4B is a vertical cross-sectional view of the second operating portion 33 in the induction state.

  When the guide member 55 is disposed at the guide position, the distal end side of the guide member 55 protrudes from the inlet portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 toward the game area PA. This amount of protrusion is such that it is possible to receive a game ball flowing down from the front area of the entrance 53a in the game area PA from below. The top surface of the guide member 55 is inclined downward toward the inlet 53 a of the discharge passage 53, so that the game ball received from below on the front end side of the guide member 55 is the top surface of the guide member 55. To be guided into the discharge passage 53. In addition, when the blocking member 57 is disposed at the non-blocking position, the blocking member 57 is displaced so that its tip end is positioned above the blocking position, so that the game rolls on the upper surface of the guide member 55. The sphere flows into the discharge passage 53 without interfering with the blocking member 57. Thereby, when the guide drive unit 56 is in the drive state, the game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance 53a in the game area PA enters the second operating unit 33. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the guide drive unit 56 is in the non-driven state, the guide member 55 is disposed at the initial position, and the blocking member 57 is disposed at the blocked position. A closed state of the portion 33, a non-accepting state of the second operating portion 33, and a non-inducting state of the second operating portion 33). Is in the non-blocking position is referred to as a guiding state of the guiding unit 52 (or an open state of the second operating portion 33, a receiving state of the second operating portion 33, a guiding state of the second operating portion 33).

  The second operating portion 33 includes a cover member 59 provided so as to face the inlet portion 53 a of the discharge passage 53 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The cover member 59 is formed in a gate shape so as to form a vertical passage portion 59a in the front area of the entrance portion 53a in the game area PA, and 1 game ball passing through the front area of the entrance portion 53a simultaneously. It is provided to restrict the movement of the game ball to the front and the lateral direction of the pachinko machine 10 while limiting the number of the game balls. This prevents a plurality of game balls from being simultaneously guided into the discharge passage 53 of the second operating portion 33 when the guiding unit 52 of the second operating portion 33 is in the guiding state. It is possible to reliably guide the game ball passing through the front area of the inlet portion 53a into the discharge passage 53 in the guide state.

  As shown in FIG. 3, in the right area PA3, a special-purpose through winning portion 34 and a distributing through winning portion 35 are juxtaposed in the vertical direction above the second operating portion 33. In other words, the special drawing through winning section 34 and the distributing through winning section 35 are not allowed to win when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the right area PA3. When the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down, a prize can be won. The special drawing through winning portion 34 and the distributing through winning portion 35 have through holes penetrating in the vertical direction, and the vertical holes of the special drawing through winning portion 34 are arranged so that the through holes are on the same axis. A distribution through winning portion 35 is provided at a lower position. The distance between the special drawing through winning portion 34 and the distributing through winning portion 35 is about one game ball, and the through hole of the special drawing through winning portion 34 and the through through winning portion for distributing. No obstruction member such as a nail 23b is provided between the through hole of the portion 35. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the special drawing through winning section 34 in the vertical direction surely passes through the distributing through winning section 35. A second actuating portion 33 is provided at a position vertically below the distribution through winning portion 35. Further, in the right region PA3, the special electric prize winning device 37 and the swinging device are disposed downstream of the second actuating portion 33. A prize winning device 36 is provided. Accordingly, it is possible for a game ball that has won the special drawing through winning section 34 or the distributing through winning section 35 to win the second operating section 33, the special electric prize winning device 37, or the distributing winning apparatus 36. .

  In the right area PA3 in which the second actuating part 33, the special drawing through winning part 34, and the distributing through winning part 35 are collectively arranged, the left side of the variable display unit 41 is in front of the pachinko machine 10 in the variable display unit 41. The right side is defined by a regulating wall that is provided on the resin base 21 of the inner frame 13 and protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 23. The right-side area PA3 is set to have a smaller horizontal dimension than the lower area PA4, and the horizontal dimension is such that it is impossible to line up the game ball entry devices in the horizontal direction at the same height position. It has become. As a result, it is possible to limit the flow trajectory of the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 to a predetermined range, and the game to the second actuating portion 33, the special drawing through winning portion 34, and the distributing through winning portion 35. It is easy for balls to enter.

  In the right area PA3, the arrangement of the plurality of nails 23b on the upstream side of the special drawing through winning section 34 is set so as to guide the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 to the special drawing through winning section 34. . Thereby, the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 is easy to enter the special drawing through winning portion 34, and the second operating portion 33 and It is easy to enter the distribution through winning portion 35.

  A special sensor through winning portion 34 is provided with a detection sensor 34a, and the detection sensor 34a detects a game ball that has won the special figure through winning portion 34. In addition, the distribution through winning portion 35 is provided with a detection sensor 35a, and the detection sensor 35a detects a game ball won in the distribution through winning portion 35.

  Based on the winning in the special drawing through winning section 34, the guiding unit 52 of the second operating section 33 is switched from the non-inducing state to the guiding state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning in the special figure through winning section 34 as a trigger, and the normal figure unit 43 provided in the lower left corner, which is an area through which a game ball does not pass in the game area PA, is used. The graphic display is changed on the figure display unit 43a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a winning in the guidance execution state, a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and when the variable display of the pattern in the general map display unit 43a is finished, the state shifts to the guidance execution state. In the guidance execution state, the guidance unit 52 enters the guidance state in a predetermined manner.

  The general-purpose display unit 43a is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is impossible to perform complicated display as in the symbol display device 44 described later on the general-purpose display unit 43a, but it is possible to reduce the processing load for display control of the general-purpose display unit 43a. Become. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern displayed on the general map display unit 43a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable.

  In the universal map unit 43, a universal map hold display section 43b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal map display section 43a. The number of game balls won in the special drawing through winning section 34 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the general figure holding display section 43b.

  Incidentally, the display range of the general-purpose display unit 43a is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44 described later. Furthermore, the display range for both the general symbol display unit 43 a and the general symbol hold display unit 43 b is also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise a player's attention degree to the symbol display device 44 rather than the general symbol display unit 43a and the general diagram hold display unit 43b.

  A winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a winning in the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33. When the winning lottery is performed, the special figure unit 42 displays the change of the pattern, and finally the result corresponding to the winning lottery result is displayed.

  Specifically, the special figure unit 42 is provided with a special figure display unit 42a. In the special figure display unit 42a, a winning lottery is performed based on the winning of the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33, thereby displaying the variation of the pattern. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The variation display of the pattern is started in the special figure display unit 42a, and the display until the variation display of the pattern is terminated after displaying a predetermined result corresponds to one game.

  The special figure display unit 42a is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is impossible to perform complicated display like the symbol display device 44 described later on the special figure display unit 42a, but it is possible to reduce the processing load for display control of the special figure display unit 42a. Become. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern displayed on the special figure display unit 42a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors A configuration in which is displayed is considered.

  In the special figure unit 42, a special figure holding display part 42b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display part 42a. The number of game balls won in the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the special figure display unit 42b. The display range of the special figure display section 42a is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44 described later. Further, the display range for the entire special figure display unit 42 a and special figure hold display unit 42 b is also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise a player's attention degree to the symbol display device 44 rather than the special figure display part 42a and the special figure hold display part 42b.

  When the variable display of the pattern is performed in the special symbol display unit 42a, a display effect is performed in accordance with the symbol display device 44 provided in the variable display unit 41. The symbol display device 44 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The display contents on the symbol display device 44 will be described in detail later. The symbol display device 44 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display surface such as a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be.

  When the winning lottery based on the winning to the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33 becomes a winning result, and the game round corresponding to the winning result is finished, the winning to the distribution through winning unit 35 is valid. Become. Then, when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs during the winning validity period, the mode shifts to a distribution execution mode in which a winning to the distribution winning device 36 is possible. Note that, when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs during the winning validity period and a shift to the distribution execution mode occurs, the winning to the distributing through winning portion 35 becomes invalid again.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the distribution winning device 36 is provided at a position below the second operating portion 33 in the right region PA3. In other words, the allocation winning device 36 is not allowed to win when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the shooting operation so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. Winning is possible when the device 28 is being operated.

  The configuration of the distribution winning device 36 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 in addition to FIG. FIG. 5 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the distribution winning device 36.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the distribution winning device 36 includes a distribution inlet 61 that is large enough to allow a game ball to pass therethrough, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass through the distribution inlet 61 and a game. A distribution-side opening / closing member 62 that switches to an open state in which a ball can pass is provided. The distribution-side opening / closing member 62 is opened by being driven by a distribution inlet drive unit 63 through a link mechanism (not shown).

  As shown in FIG. 5, the game ball that has won the distribution entrance 61 is led out to a branch passage 65 formed in the base body 64 of the distribution winning apparatus 36. The branch passage 65 includes an upstream passage region 65a set so that the passage direction is inclined downward in the horizontal direction from the entrance portion of the branch passage 65 to the middle position of the branch passage 65, and the upstream passage region 65a. The discharge passage area 65b is set to be continuous with the downstream end of the discharge passage so that the passage direction is vertically downward, and is branched from the midway position of the discharge passage area 65b. And a V winning path area 65c for guiding the ball. In this case, since the dimension of the upstream passage area 65a in the direction orthogonal to the passage direction is not less than one game ball and less than two game balls, the upstream passage region 65a is in a direction orthogonal to the passage direction. The game ball is prevented from passing through the upstream passage area 65a in a state where a plurality of game balls are arranged. Therefore, a plurality of game balls are prevented from reaching the branch position to the V winning path area 65c in the discharge path area 65b at the same time.

  A switching piece 66 for guiding the game ball that has flowed into the discharge path area 65b to the V prize path area 65c is provided at a branch point of the discharge path area 65b to the V prize path area 65c. The switching piece 66 is rotatably supported in a region opposite to the V winning award passage region 65c with respect to the discharge passage region 65b in the base body 64, and is retracted as a whole outside the discharge passage region 65b. The position can be displaced between the position and the V guide position protruding into the discharge passage area 65b. The switching force is transmitted to the switching piece 66 through a transmission unit (not shown). When the switching drive unit 67 is in the non-driven state, the switching piece 66 is disposed at the retracted position by the biasing force of a biasing means such as a spring (not shown), and the switching drive unit 67 is in the driving state. The switching piece 66 is displaced against the urging force and disposed at the V guide position.

  When the switching piece 66 is disposed at the retracted position, the game ball that has flowed into the branch passage 65 flows down the discharge passage region 65b without being guided to the V winning passage region 65c. Then, the game ball is discharged to the rear of the game board 23 after being detected by the count detection sensor 68 provided downstream of the branch position by the switching piece 66 in the discharge passage area 65b. On the other hand, when the switching piece 66 is disposed at the V guide position, the game ball that has flowed into the branch passage 65 is received from below by the switching piece 66. The upper surface of the switching piece 66 in the state where it is arranged at the V guide position is inclined downward toward the V winning path area 65c. Thereby, the game ball received from below by the switching piece 66 flows into the V winning path area 65c by its own weight, and flows down through the V winning path area 65c. The game ball is discharged to the rear of the game board 23 after being detected by a V winning detection sensor 69 provided in the V winning path area 65c.

  Whether the game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 68 or the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the same number of award balls corresponding to the distribution winning device 36 is paid out. Is done. In addition, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the distribution execution mode, an opening / closing execution mode occurs after the distribution execution mode. On the other hand, when the distribution execution mode ends without the game ball being detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the opening / closing execution mode does not occur.

  In the period in which the distribution execution mode is set, the pattern display is performed by the distribution display unit 42c provided in the special figure unit 42. The period during which the variation display of the pattern is displayed on the distribution display unit 42c will be described in detail. The winning effective period in which the winning result is displayed on the special display unit 42a and the winning to the distribution through winning unit 35 is valid. When it is started, the variation display of the pattern is started in the distribution display part 42c. Then, when the distribution execution mode ends, the change display of the pattern is ended. In this case, when detection of a game ball is occurring in the V winning detection sensor 69 in the distribution execution mode, the display of the variation of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c is completed in a state where the stop result at the time of V winning is displayed. In the distribution execution mode, when no game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the change display of the pattern on the distribution display unit 42c is terminated with the stop result at the time of non-V winning being displayed. Is done. When the stop result at the time of V winning is displayed, the opening / closing execution mode occurs after that, and when the stop result at the time of non-V winning is displayed, the opening / closing execution is triggered by the execution of the current distribution execution mode. There is no transition to mode.

  The distribution display unit 42c is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is impossible to perform complicated display like the symbol display device 44 in the distribution display unit 42c, but it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the distribution display unit 42c. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern displayed on the distribution display unit 42c, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors A configuration in which is displayed is considered.

  The display range of the distribution display unit 42 c is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise a player's attention degree to the symbol display device 44 rather than the distribution display part 42c.

  In the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to win the special electric prize winning device 37. As shown in FIG. 3, the special prize winning device 37 is provided at a position below the second operating unit 33 and above the sorting prize winning device 36 in the right region PA3. That is, the special electric prize winning device 37 cannot receive a prize when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the shooting operation device so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. Winning is possible when 28 is operated.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the special electric prize winning device 37 has a large winning opening 37a of a size that allows a game ball to pass through, and a closed state in which the gaming ball cannot pass through the large winning opening 37a and the gaming ball. Is provided with a special electric side opening / closing member 37b for switching to an open state in which can pass. The special electric side opening / closing member 37b is opened by being driven by a special electric drive unit 37c through a link mechanism (not shown). The special electric prize winning device 37 is provided with a game ball passage so that the big prize opening 37a serves as an entrance portion, and the game ball that has flowed into the game ball passage through the big winning opening 37a is a special electric prize detection sensor provided in the game ball passage. After being detected by 37d, it is discharged behind the game board 23.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 23 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 71 so that almost the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window portion 71 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 72 is fitted therein. The window panel 72 is formed of colorless and transparent with glass, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed of colorless and transparent with synthetic resin, and the game area PA is defined through the window panel 72 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

  A display light emitting unit 73 is provided above the window unit 71. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker units 74 that output sound effects according to the gaming state are provided. Further, below the window portion 71, an upper bulging portion 75 and a lower bulging portion 76 that bulge toward the front side are arranged side by side. An upper plate 75a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge portion 75, and a lower plate 76a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge portion 76. The upper plate 75a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a row. In addition, the lower tray 76a has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 75a.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 81 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 23). The main control device 81 has a main control board accommodated in a board box. In addition, you may provide the trace structure for giving the trace means for leaving the trace of the opening to the board | substrate box, or leaving the trace of the open. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer that remains on an adhesion target at the time of peeling is peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of what has been done is pasted so as to straddle the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 81. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 82 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and a payout mechanism 83 and a control device assembly unit 84 are attached to the back pack 82.

  The payout mechanism 83 includes a tank 85 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 86 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 85. The game balls paid out from the payout device 86 are discharged to the upper plate 75a or the lower plate 76a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 86. The payout mechanism 83 is mounted with a backpack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power supply, for example, while supplying main power of AC 24 volts.

  The control device assembly unit 84 generates and outputs a predetermined power required by a payout control device 87 having a function of controlling the payout device 86 and various control devices, and is accompanied by an operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. And a power supply / launch control device 88 for controlling the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 87 and the power supply / launch control device 88 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 87 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board 91 that controls the main control of the game. An MPU 92 is mounted on the main control board 91. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 81.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 95 provided in the main control device 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and a payout control device 87 is connected. The power failure monitoring board 95 is connected to a power supply / launch control device 88 having a function of supplying operating power, and power is supplied to the MPU 92 via the power failure monitoring board 95.

  Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 32a, 34a, 35a, 37d, 54, 68, and 69 (hereinafter referred to as various winning detection sensors 32a to 69) are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. The various winning detection sensors 32 a to 69 include a detection sensor 32 a provided in the first operation unit 32, a detection sensor 54 provided in the second operation unit 33, and a detection sensor 34 a provided in the through-winning unit 34 for special drawings. , A detection sensor 35 a provided in the distribution through winning portion 35, a count detection sensor 68 and V winning detection sensor 69 provided in the distribution winning device 36, and a special electricity prize detection sensor 37 d provided in the special electricity prize device 37. Is included. In addition, a detection sensor provided in the general winning portion 31 is included. Based on the detection results of these various winning detection sensors 32a to 69, the MPU 92 makes a winning determination to each winning corresponding winning portion. Further, the MPU 92 executes various lotteries based on winnings to the first operating unit 32 and the second operating unit 33.

  A power failure monitoring board 95, a payout control device 87, and a sound emission control device 101 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. For example, the payout control device 87 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion. When the payout control device 87 receives a prize ball command, the payout device 86 is driven to control the number of game balls specified by the prize ball command. Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 101.

  On the output side of the MPU 92, the guide drive unit 56 switches the guide unit 52 of the second operating unit 33 between the non-guided state and the guided state (in other words, opens and closes the inlet 53a of the second operating unit 33). The switching entrance driving unit 63 for opening and closing the distribution side opening / closing member 62 of the distribution winning device 36 and the switching piece 66 for shifting the switching piece 66 of the distribution winning device 36 between the retracted position and the V guide position. The drive unit 67, the special electric drive unit 37c for opening and closing the special electric side opening / closing member 37b of the special electric prize winning device 37, the special figure unit 42, and the universal figure unit 43 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 42 is provided with a special figure display part 42 a, a special figure holding display part 42 b and a distribution display part 42 c, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. Similarly, the universal map unit 43 is provided with a universal map display unit 43 a and a universal map hold display unit 43 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. The main control board 91 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 92 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, when the guidance state of the guidance unit 52 is won, the MPU 92 outputs a drive signal to the guide drive unit 56 so that the guidance unit 52 is in the guidance state, and the return condition to the non-guidance state is satisfied. Then, the output of the drive signal is stopped to return the induction unit 52 to the non-induction state. Further, when the opening start condition for the distribution inlet 61 is satisfied in the distribution execution mode, the MPU 92 outputs a drive signal to the distribution inlet drive unit 63 so that the distribution inlet 61 is in an open state. When the closing condition of the distribution inlet 61 is satisfied, the output of the drive signal is stopped and the distribution inlet 61 is closed. Further, when the guidance start condition to the V winning path area 65c is established in the distribution execution mode, the MPU 92 outputs a drive signal to the switching drive unit 67 so that the switching piece 66 is disposed at the V guidance position. When the return condition to the retracted position is satisfied, the output of the drive signal is stopped and the switching piece 66 is returned to the retracted position. In addition, in the opening / closing execution mode, when the opening start condition of the special winning opening 37a is satisfied, the MPU 92 sends a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 37c so that the special winning opening 37a is in an open state in which a game ball can be won. When the closing condition of the special winning opening 37a is established, the output of the drive signal is stopped to make the special winning opening 37a in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won. Further, the display control of the special figure unit 42 is executed in the MPU 92 in each game time, the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 and the distribution execution mode. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not the guidance unit 52 is in the guidance state is clearly indicated, the display control of the general-purpose unit 43 is executed in the MPU 92.

  The power failure monitoring board 95 relays between the main control board 91 and the power supply / launch control device 88, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / launch control device 88. The payout control device 87 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 86 based on the prize ball command input from the MPU 92 of the main control device 81.

  The power / launch control device 88 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main controller 81, the payout controller 87, and the like, and the generated operating power is supplied.

  Specifically, the power supply / launch control device 88 is provided with a power supply unit for power application 88a and a power supply unit for power interruption 88b. The power supply unit for power supply 88a is connected to, for example, a commercial power source in a game hall or the like, and generates operating power and supplies the generated operating power in a situation where external power is supplied from the commercial power source. It has the function to do. The power supply unit for power interruption 88b is made of a capacitor, and the power supplied from the power supply unit for power supply 88a when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from an external power supply). Is charged. Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF or when the power is cut off such as when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply (when power supply from the external power supply is cut off), the main power unit 88b is discharged from the power interruption. Backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the control device 81 and the RAM (not shown) of the payout control device 87. Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the RAM 94 of the main controller 81 and the RAM of the payout controller 87 is not erased while the backup power is being supplied from the power supply unit 88b during power interruption. Retained.

  Here, the RAM 94 of the main control device 81 temporarily stores information on the current gaming state and the progress of the game, and the RAM of the payout control device 87 temporarily stores information on the number of unpaid prize balls. Is done. In this case, since the backup power is supplied to the RAMs from the power supply unit 88b for power interruption as described above, even if there is no power supply from the power supply unit 88a for power supply, the current game It is possible to store and hold the state, the progress of the game, and unpaid prize ball information for a predetermined period. On the other hand, the backup power is not supplied to the sound emission control device 101 and the display control device 111 from the power interruption unit 88b. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 105 of the sound emission control device 101 and the RAM 115 of the display control device 111 is not backed up, and is destroyed or destroyed when the power supply from the power-on unit 88a is turned off. Erased.

  The capacity of the power supply unit 88b for power interruption is relatively large, and the information stored in the RAM 94 of the main control device 81 before the power interruption is retained within a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days). The The power supply unit 88b for power interruption is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery or a non-rechargeable battery.

  The power supply / launch control device 88 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure (not shown) different from the power supply unit 88b for power interruption. In the power source / launch control device 88, even after the DC stable power source of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power source unit for power failure is discharged for a time sufficient for execution of the power failure process described later, The output of 5 volts, which is a drive power source for the control system, is configured to maintain a normal value. Thereby, main controller 81 etc. can perform and complete processing at the time of a power failure normally.

  In addition to the various power supply units 88a and 88b, the power supply / launch control device 88 is provided with a launch control unit 88c. A touch sensor 28a, a push sensor 28b, and a variable resistor 28c built in the firing operation device 28 are electrically connected to the firing control unit 88c.

  The touch sensor 28a has a built-in capacitor. When the player's hand touches the outer surface of the operation handle and the capacitance of the capacitor changes, a predetermined electrical signal corresponding to the handle operation detection is emitted. Output to. The firing control unit 88c recognizes that the player's hand is in contact with the outer surface of the operation handle by receiving the predetermined electric signal. The firing control unit 88c grasps whether or not the firing stop switch of the firing operation device 28 is operated according to the electrical signal received from the push sensor 28b, and operates according to the electrical signal received through the variable resistor 28c. The amount of rotation operation of is grasped.

  The launch control unit 88c transmits a condition establishment signal in a predetermined signal form to the MPU 92 of the main control device 81 when a predetermined game ball launch condition is established. Specifically, the firing control unit 88c receives a signal indicating that the operation handle is touched by the player from the touch sensor 28a, and a signal indicating that the firing stop switch is not manually operated by the player. Is continuously transmitted from the push sensor 28b to the MPU 92 on the condition satisfaction signal (signal corresponding to the condition satisfaction). If any of the above signals has not been received, a LOW level condition establishment signal (a signal not corresponding to the condition establishment) is transmitted to the MPU 92. However, the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. In addition to the above conditions, a condition that the ball lending device is connected to the pachinko machine 10 may be added as a condition for transmitting a condition establishment signal corresponding to the condition establishment.

  In the MPU 92, when the HI level condition establishment signal is received and the game ball can be permitted to be released, the HI level launch permission signal (a signal corresponding to the launch permission) is sent to the launch control unit 88c. Is sent continuously. Note that the MPU 92 transmits a LOW level launch permission signal (a signal not corresponding to launch permission) when the HI level condition establishment signal is not received from the launch control unit 88c, but the launch permission signal LOW. The relationship between the level and the HI level may be reversed.

  When the game ball launching mechanism 27 is electrically connected and receives a HI level launch permission signal from the MPU 92, the launch control unit 88c periodically drives and controls the game ball launching mechanism 27. In this case, if the game ball is continuously supplied to the game ball launching mechanism 27, one game ball is launched into the game area PA in a specific launch cycle (specifically 0.6 sec). . Further, since the firing intensity is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c at the time of launching, the game ball is launched at an intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle.

  The sound emission control apparatus 101 includes a sound emission control board 102 on which an MPU 103 is mounted. The MPU 103 includes a ROM 104 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 103 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 104 is executed. A certain RAM 105, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated. Based on the command received from the main control device 81, the MPU 103 drives and controls the display light emitting unit 73 and the speaker unit 74 and transmits the command to the display control device 111.

  The display control device 111 includes a display control board 112 on which the MPU 113 is mounted. The MPU 113 includes a ROM 114 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 113 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 114 is executed. A RAM 115, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated. The MPU 113 controls the symbol display device 44 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 101.

  Although not shown, the display control board 112 includes a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like in addition to the MPU 113. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver installed in the symbol display device 44. The VDP intervenes in reading and writing data in the video RAM, and reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 44. The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 44. This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 44, and the display contents of the symbol display device 44 are changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the main controller 81 are referred to as the main MPU 92, main ROM 93, and main RAM 94, and the MPU 103, ROM 104, and RAM 105 of the sound emission controller 101 are used as sound light. The side MPU 103, the sound side ROM 104, and the sound side RAM 105 are referred to as the MPU 113, the ROM 114, and the RAM 115 of the display control device 111, and are referred to as the display side MPU 113, the display side ROM 114, and the display side RAM 115, respectively.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 92>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 92 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main side MPU 92 uses various counter information in the game, and wins lottery, setting of the display of the special symbol display unit 42a, lottery of the execution mode of the distribution execution mode, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 44, general symbol display unit Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, a winning random number counter C1 used for the winning lottery and a type counter C2 used for determining the winning type, as shown in FIG. A game in the distribution counter C3 used for lottery of the execution mode of the distribution execution mode, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the special figure display unit 42a and the symbol display device 44 The fluctuation type counter CS used when determining the fluctuation display period is used. Furthermore, the main power random number counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the guidance unit 52 of the second operation unit 33 is in the guidance state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 121 of the main RAM 94.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds “1” to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 and the type counter C2 is stored in the special figure reservation area 122 provided in the main side RAM 94 when a winning to the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33 occurs. . The special figure holding area 122 includes a first area 123a, a second area 123b, a third area 123c, and a fourth area 123d. According to the winning history for the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33, Each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 and the type counter C2 is stored in any one of the areas 123a to 123d as the hold information on the first special figure side.

  In this case, in the first area 123a to the fourth area 123d, the first area 123a → the second area 123b → when the winning to the first operating part 32 or the second operating part 33 is continuously generated a plurality of times. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the third area 123c → the fourth area 123d. By providing the four areas 123a to 123d as described above, up to four game ball winning histories to the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33 are held and stored.

  The number that can be reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 123 is not limited to four and may be arbitrary, and may be other plural such as two, three, or five or more. May be singular.

  In addition to the first area 123a to the fourth area 123d, a special figure execution area 124 is provided in the special figure reservation area 122. The special figure execution area 124 is an area for storing the hold information to be subjected to special figure determination or type determination when the special figure display unit 42a starts changing the display of the pattern. The hold information stored in the first area 123a is shifted to the special figure execution area 124 when variable display of the special figure display unit 42a is started.

  Information corresponding to the distribution counter C3 is stored in the distribution execution area 125 provided in the main RAM 94 when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs. The distribution execution area 125 is an area in which numerical information for determining the execution mode of the distribution execution mode when the distribution execution mode in the distribution prize winning device 36 is started is stored. In the allocation execution area 125, when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs during the winning validity period in which the winning to the distributing through winning portion 35 is valid, the distribution counter C3 Is stored.

  Information corresponding to the general electric random number counter C4 is stored in the general figure holding area 126 provided in the main side RAM 94 when a prize is awarded to the special figure through winning part 34. The special figure holding area 126 includes a first area 127a, a second area 127b, a third area 127c, and a fourth area 127d. The numerical information of C4 is stored in any one of the areas 127a to 127d as the hold information on the normal side.

  In this case, in the first area 127a to the fourth area 127d, the first area 127a → the second area 127b → the third area 127c when the winning to the special drawing through winning portion 34 is continuously generated a plurality of times. → Numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the fourth area 127d. By providing the four areas 127a to 127d as described above, up to four game ball winning histories to the special-purpose through winning portion 34 are stored on hold.

  Note that the number that can be stored in the reserved map area 126 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be two, three, five or more, and the like. It may be.

  In the common map hold area 126, an execution area 128 for general maps is provided. The execution area 128 for the common map is an area in which the hold information to be subjected to the determination of whether or not to guide is stored when the variable display is started in the general map display unit 43a. Specifically, when the variable display of the general map display unit 43a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 127a of the general map hold area 126 is shifted to the execution area 128 for the normal map.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the general-purpose random number counter C4 will be described. The general-purpose random number counter C4 is incremented by 1 within a range of “0 to 250” and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The general-purpose random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and the value of the general-purpose random number counter C4 at that time is stored in the general-purpose holding area 126 at the timing when the game ball is won in the special-purpose through winning unit 34. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the guidance unit 52 is controlled to the guidance state based on the stored value of the general-purpose random number counter C4.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of modes are set as support modes so that the support modes of the guidance unit 52 are different. Specifically, in the support mode, the frequency at which the guidance unit 52 enters the guidance state per unit time when compared with the game area PA in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in a similar manner is relative. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so as to be high and low.

  The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode have the same probability (for example, both 4/5) in the induction state winning in the induction state lottery using the general-purpose random number counter C4. In the low-frequency support mode, the number of times that the guidance unit 52 enters the guidance state when the guidance state is won is set, and the guidance unit 52 is maintained in the guidance state in one execution of guidance control. The upper limit induction period to be set is long. In this case, when the induction state is won in the high frequency support mode and the induction state of the induction unit 52 occurs multiple times, the closing period from the end of one induction state to the start of the next induction state is It is set shorter than one upper limit induction period. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (ie, the normal map display section) after the next guidance state lottery is performed after one guidance state lottery is performed, compared to the low-frequency support mode. The display continuation time once in 43a) is set short.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the second operating unit 33 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the first operating unit 32 than in the second operating unit 33, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than in the first operating unit 32. The probability of winning a prize in the section 33 increases. When a winning to the second operating unit 33 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls. It can be carried out.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high-frequency support mode is in the guided state per unit time is higher than that in the low-frequency support mode. It is good also as a structure which makes the probability of becoming high. In addition, a secured time (for example, based on the winning to the special drawing through winning section 34, in the general map display section 43a) secured after the next guiding state lottery is performed after the first guiding state lottery is performed. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display times) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a short securing time is easily selected or the average secure time is shorter than in the low frequency support mode. It may be. Furthermore, the number of executions of the guidance state is increased, the upper limit induction period is lengthened, and the securing time secured when the next guidance state lottery is performed after one guidance state lottery is performed is shortened. The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of the conditions for shortening the average time of the reservation time and increasing the winning probability. .

  Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is incremented by “1” in order within the range of “0 to 399”, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 399). The winning random number counter C <b> 1 is periodically updated, and the value of the winning random number counter C <b> 1 at that time is stored in the special figure reservation area 122 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33. Then, the determination of success / failure is performed using the value of the stored random number counter C1.

  The random number value that is won at the time of determination of success / failure is stored in the main ROM 93 as a success / failure table. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode and a success / failure table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the success / failure lottery mode in the success / failure lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the low-probability mode success / failure table is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that are the winning results is ten. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the high-probability mode success / failure table is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that are the winning results is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary. If the winning result is obtained, a winning validity period in which winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 is valid occurs, and distribution is executed when the winning to the distributing through winning portion 35 occurs. It will shift to the mode.

  The type counter C2 is configured such that “1” is sequentially added within the range of “0 to 29”, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the value of the type counter C2 at that time is stored in the special figure reservation area 122 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of hit results are set. These multiple winning results are: (1) a winning lottery mode in a winning lottery after the branch execution mode without the transition to the opening / closing execution mode or after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (2) no transition to the opening / closing execution mode. It is set by providing a difference in the two conditions of the support mode in the guidance unit 52 of the second operating unit 33 after the branch execution mode ends or after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  The assignment destination of the hit result for the type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 93 as a type table. And as such a distribution destination, a low probability big hit result and a high probability big hit result are set. Specifically, in the type table, among the values of the type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 15” corresponds to the low probability result, and “16 to 29” corresponds to the high probability result. It corresponds.

  The low probability result is obtained when the success / failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the branch execution mode without transition to the opening / closing execution mode or after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is a result. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

  The high-accuracy result indicates that the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the branch execution mode without switching to the opening / closing execution mode or after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is a result. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the winning lottery results in a winning result and shifts to the winning valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 by that.

  It should be noted that the normal gaming state in relation to each of the above gaming states is not the winning validity period, the distribution execution mode and the opening / closing execution mode of the distribution through winning portion 35, and the winning / no-win lottery mode is a low probability mode, This means that the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  The distribution counter C3 is configured so that “1” is added in order within the range of “0 to 29” and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The distribution counter C3 is periodically updated, and the value of the distribution counter C3 at that time is a timing at which a winning to the distribution through winning unit 35 occurs during the winning validity period of the distributing through winning unit 35. It is stored in the execution area 125 for distribution. Then, the distribution execution mode is executed in the execution mode corresponding to the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125.

  Here, in the distribution execution mode, a predetermined number of times that the distribution inlet 61 is opened up to a predetermined distribution release period as an upper limit is executed, and a predetermined distribution-side upper limit is set. The process continues until one of the conditions for the number of game balls to win the distribution winning device 36 is satisfied. In addition, in the one-time opening mode of the distribution winning device 36, a plurality of types are set with different distribution opening periods from when the distribution inlet 61 is opened until it is closed. More specifically, the distribution-side long-term mode in which the distribution release period is set to 29 seconds, which is a long time, and the distribution-side medium in which the distribution release period is set to 15 seconds, which is a medium time shorter than the above-mentioned long time. A period mode and a short period mode in which the distribution release period is set to 0.5 sec, which is a short time shorter than the medium time, are set. In the present pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Is done. In addition, the upper limit number of distribution sides in the distribution execution mode is set to 10. Then, in the distribution side long-term aspect and the distribution-side middle period aspect among the above-described release aspects, the distribution release period is set longer than the product of the game ball firing period and the distribution-side upper limit number. It will be. On the other hand, in the distribution-side short period mode, a distribution release period of a time shorter than the product of the game ball firing period and the number of distribution-side upper limit, more specifically, a time shorter than the game ball firing period is set. Has been. Therefore, when the distribution winning device 36 is opened once in the distribution-side long-term mode or the distribution-side middle-period mode, a prize corresponding to the distribution-side upper limit number is generated at the distribution entrance 61. It is expected that when the distribution winning device 36 is opened once in the distribution-side short period mode, no winning at the distribution entrance 61 occurs.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of execution modes of the distribution execution mode are set. Specifically, the first sorting execution mode in which the sorting inlet 61 is opened only once in the sorting-side long-term mode, and the sorting inlet 61 is opened once in the sorting-side short-term mode. After that, there is a second distribution execution mode in which the distribution inlet 61 is opened once in the distribution-side middle period mode.

  The operation modes of the distribution winning device 36 in each of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 8 (a1) and FIG. 8 (a2) show the execution period of the distribution execution mode, FIG. 8 (b1) and FIG. 8 (b2) show the distribution release period of the distribution winning device 36, FIG. c1) and FIG. 8 (c2) show a period in which the switching piece 66 of the sorting and winning device 36 is arranged at the V guide position.

  First, the first distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. At the timing t1, the first distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 8 (a1), and the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started as shown in FIG. 8 (b1). In this case, in the first distribution execution mode, the opening according to the distribution-side long-term mode is performed.

  Thereafter, at a timing t2, when the predetermined period (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed since the opening of the distribution inlet 61 was first started, the switching piece 66 is guided from the retracted position to the V position as shown in FIG. Switch to position. Thereafter, when the V induction continuation period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the timing t2, at the timing t3, the switching piece 66 is switched from the V induction position to the retracted position as shown in FIG.

  In this case, in the first distribution execution mode, the opening of the distribution inlet 61 according to the distribution-side long-term mode is executed, and the timing at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guide position in relation to the game ball firing cycle is Even if the launch operation is continued aiming at winning the distribution winning device 36 before the start of the first distribution execution mode, the number of winnings to the distribution winning device 36 surely reaches the upper limit number on the distribution side. It is a timing not to. Therefore, if the launch operation is continued aiming at winning the distribution winning device 36 in the first distribution execution mode, any of the game balls winning the distribution entrance 61 will receive the V winning of the distribution winning device 36. The game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 after being reliably guided to the passage area 65c. When the V winning detection sensor 69 detects the game ball, the opening / closing execution mode is started after the end of the first distribution execution mode.

  Thereafter, when the distribution opening period corresponding to the distribution-side long-term mode elapses at the timing of t4, the distribution inlet 61 is closed as illustrated in FIG. 8 (b1), and illustrated in FIG. Thus, the first distribution execution mode ends. In addition, when the number of winnings to the sorting winning device 36 reaches the sorting-side upper limit before the allocation opening period elapses, the sorting inlet 61 is closed at a timing earlier than the timing of t4, and the first. The distribution execution mode ends. However, even in this case, as described above, the first distribution execution mode is ended after an opportunity for the game ball to be guided to the V winning path area 65c occurs.

  Next, the second distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. At the timing of t11, the second distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 8 (a2), and the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started as shown in FIG. 8 (b2). In this case, in the second distribution execution mode, the opening of the distribution inlet 61 corresponds to the distribution-side short period mode. The distribution opening period according to the distribution side short period mode is shorter than the period required from when the distribution inlet 61 is first opened until the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guide position. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 8 (b2) and 8 (c2), the distribution inlet 61 is at the timing t12, which is the timing before the timing t13, which is the timing at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guide position. Closed. However, even if the distribution inlet 61 is closed, the second distribution execution mode is not ended and is continued.

  After that, at the timing of t13 when the second distribution execution mode is continued and the distribution inlet 61 is continuously closed, the predetermined distribution after the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is first started. When the time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the switching piece 66 is switched from the retracted position to the V guide position as shown in FIG. After that, at the timing t14 when the second distribution execution mode is continued and the distribution inlet 61 is continuously closed, the V induction continuation period (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed from the timing t13. As a result, the switching piece 66 is switched from the V guide position to the retracted position as shown in FIG.

  In this case, since the opening mode of the distribution entrance 61 is the distribution side short period mode in the first opening time in the second distribution execution mode, no winning in the distribution winning device 36 occurs in the first opening time. Probability is high. Further, even if a prize is awarded to the allocation prize winning device 36, the game ball that wins the distribution prize winning device 36 and normally flows down at the timing when the first opening round ends is branched in the allocation prize winning device 36. The longest period required to reach the downstream side of the branch position to the V winning path area 65c in the path 65 is the period from the end of the first opening to the timing when the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guide position. Shorter than (timing from t12 to timing from t13). Therefore, even if the launch operation is continued in order to win the distribution winning device 36 in the second distribution execution mode, the game ball can be detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36. The nature is low. Since the V winning detection sensor 69 does not detect a game ball, the opening / closing execution mode is not started after the end of the second distribution execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b2), the distribution inlet 61 is opened again at the timing t15 which is a timing after the timing t14 which is the timing when the switching piece 66 is switched from the V guide position to the retracted position. . The opening times of the distribution inlet 61 correspond to the distribution-side middle period mode. Thereafter, when the distribution opening period corresponding to the distribution-side middle period mode elapses at the timing of t16, the distribution inlet 61 is closed as illustrated in FIG. 8 (b2), and illustrated in FIG. 8 (a2). Thus, the second distribution execution mode ends. In addition, when the opening mode of the distribution entrance 61 is the distribution-side middle period mode, the number of winnings to the distribution winning device 36 reaches the distribution-side upper limit number in the distribution opening period according to the distribution-side middle period mode. obtain. Then, when the number of winning prizes to the allocation winning device 36 reaches the allocation upper limit number before the allocation release period corresponding to the allocation-side middle period mode elapses, the timing is earlier than the timing of t16. The distribution inlet 61 is closed, and the second distribution execution mode ends.

  As described above, in the first distribution execution mode, if the game ball aiming at winning the distribution winning device 36 is normally fired, the V winning detection sensor 69 detects the game ball, and the first The opening / closing execution mode occurs after the end of the one distribution execution mode. On the other hand, in the second allocation execution mode, even if the game ball aiming for winning in the allocation prize winning device 36 is normally fired, the detection of the game ball in the V winning detection sensor 69 basically occurs. No, the opening / closing execution mode does not occur after the end of the second distribution execution mode. As a result, the player expects the first distribution execution mode to occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Incidentally, in the opening / closing execution mode, a round game is executed a predetermined number of times. The round game means that a predetermined number of opening times when the special winning opening 37a is opened with a predetermined special electricity opening period as an upper limit is executed a predetermined number of times, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls is a special winning opening. It is a game that continues until either one of the conditions for winning 37a is satisfied. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode is set to 15, and in each round game, the opening of the special winning opening 37a having a special electricity release period of 29 sec and an upper limit number of 10 is one. Only executed once. In this case, as described above, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Therefore, the special electricity release period in each round game is longer than the product of the launch period of the game balls and the upper limit number of one round game. Therefore, if the game balls aiming to win the special electric prize winning device 37 are normally fired, in each round game, more than the upper limit number of game balls will win the big prize opening 37a. Each time a winning is made to the big winning opening 37a, the number of game balls corresponding to the special electricity winning device 37 is paid out. Therefore, when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the player is given the benefit of increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player.

  In addition, regardless of which of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode occurs, the distribution-side upper limit number of game balls are awarded to the distribution winning device 36 in the corresponding distribution execution mode. Can occur. Accordingly, it is possible to make the total number of winnings to the allocation winning device 36 in the allocation execution mode the same or substantially the same in the first allocation execution mode and the second allocation execution mode. It is possible to make the total number of game balls to be paid out the same or substantially the same in these branch execution modes. Thereby, even if it is the second allocation execution mode that basically does not involve the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the increase in the number of game balls that can be used by the player is equivalent to that in the first allocation execution mode. Profit can be obtained, and it is possible to reduce the player's disadvantage to the occurrence of the second distribution execution mode.

  The selection mode of the sorting execution mode for the sorting counter C3 is stored in the main ROM 93 as a sorting table. Specifically, in the distribution table, among the values of the distribution counter C3 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 2” corresponds to the first distribution execution mode, and “3 to 29” is This corresponds to the second distribution execution mode. That is, the selection probability is set lower in the first distribution execution mode than in the second distribution execution mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selection probability may be the same or substantially the same between the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. It is good also as a structure by which the selection probability is set lower than 1 distribution execution mode.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within the range of “0 to 198” and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main MPU 92 determines the variation display period in the special figure display unit 42a. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the special figure display unit 42a.

<Relationship between game flow and display contents on symbol display device 44>
Next, the relationship between the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 and the display content on the symbol display device 44 will be described. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 and the display content on the symbol display device 44.

  In the situation where neither the game turn, the winning valid period of the distribution through winning unit 35, the distribution execution mode, or the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the game ball is placed on either the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33. When winning is held or when the hold information is stored in the special figure holding area 122, the main MPU 92 executes the determination processing for the special figure side holding information as shown in FIG. 9A. Is done. In this case, the variation display of the pattern is started in the special figure display unit 42a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9A, an effect for game times is also started in the symbol display device 44.

  10 (a) and 10 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 44 in the game play, the winning valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 and the allocation execution mode. In the following description, the period in which the game time, the winning valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 and the distribution execution mode are executed are also referred to as a unit variation execution period.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, in the unit variation execution period, the symbol display device 44 has three variation display regions 131 including a first variation display region 131, a second variation display region 132, and a third variation display region 133. ~ 133 are set. In each of these three variable display areas 131 to 133, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed in a variable manner. As these multiple types of symbols, nine types of symbols each having numbers “1” to “9” are set. When symbols are displayed in the variable display areas 131 to 133, nine types of symbols are sequentially displayed in ascending order of the numbers in any of the variable display areas 131 to 133. In addition, after the symbol “9” is displayed, the display target returns to the symbol “1”. The first variation display region 131 and the second variation display region 132 are set side by side in the upper region on the display surface of the symbol display device 44, and the third variation display region 133 on the display surface of the symbol display device 44 is the first variation. It is set so as to include the horizontal center position in an area below the display area 131 and the second variable display area 132.

  FIG. 9 (A) shows a case where the main side MPU 92 executes the success / failure determination process on the special map side hold information and the effect for the game turn is started, that is, when the unit variation execution period is started. As described above, the symbol variation display is started in all of the first variation display region 131, the second variation display region 132, and the third variation display region 133 in the symbol display device 44. Thereafter, the variable display of the symbols is sequentially stopped in the order of the first variable display area 131 → the second variable display area 132 → the third variable display area 133. In this case, when the winning valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 does not occur, the reach change display is not generated on the symbol display device 44 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the variable display of symbols in the variable display areas 131 to 133 is terminated without stopping and displaying the combination of reach symbols and the combination of winning symbols.

  On the other hand, when the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs, that is, when the result of the determination process for the holding information on the special figure side is a winning result, at the timing when the game round ends, FIG. c) and as shown in FIG. 9C, the combination of reach symbols is displayed when the stopped symbols in the first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132 become the same symbol, and the third variation in that situation is displayed. In the display area 133, reach variation display in which symbol variation display is performed is performed. That is, in the first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132, the stop result after the symbol variation display corresponds to the result of the success / failure determination processing for the hold information on the special figure side, and the result of the success / failure determination processing is hit. If it is not a result, the same symbol is not stopped and displayed in the first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132, and if the result of the determination process is a hit result, the first variation display area The same symbol is stopped and displayed in 131 and the second variation display area 132.

  The timing at which the reach variation display is started in the symbol display device 44 corresponds to the end timing of the effect for game play, and the winning valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 is started at this timing. When the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 is started, as shown in FIG. 10B, the symbol display device 44 further displays the reach variation and further wins the distribution through winning portion 35. A winning aim notification image 134 for notifying that the player should aim is displayed. In the winning aim notification image 134, a special drawing through winning unit 34, a distributing through winning unit 35, a second actuating unit 33, a special electric winning device 37, and the like are arranged in the vertical direction in the right area PA3 of the game area PA. The image corresponding to the distribution winning device 36 on a one-to-one basis is the actual installation of the special drawing through winning unit 34, the distributing through winning unit 35, the second operating unit 33, the special electric winning device 37, and the distributing winning device 36. An image corresponding to the mode is displayed, and further, an image indicating that the player should aim to win the distribution through winning portion 35 is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that it is the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35. Therefore, it is easy to perform a launch operation aimed at winning a prize for the distribution through winning portion 35.

  A launch operation aimed at winning a prize in the distribution through winning section 35 is performed, and a winning in the distribution through winning section 35 occurs as shown in FIG. Judgment processing is executed. When the target selected in the distribution determination process is the first distribution execution mode, the first distribution execution mode is started in the distribution winning device 36 as shown in FIG. Even in this case, the reach fluctuation display on the symbol display device 44 is continued. Even when the first distribution execution mode is started, the display of the winning aim notification image 134 is continued together with the reach variation display. In the winning aim notification image 134, a special drawing through winning section 34, a distributing through winning section 35, a second operating section 33, a special electric winning apparatus 37, and the like are arranged in the vertical direction in the right area PA3 of the game area PA. The image corresponding to the distribution winning device 36 on a one-to-one basis is the actual installation of the special drawing through winning unit 34, the distributing through winning unit 35, the second operating unit 33, the special electric winning device 37, and the distributing winning device 36. The display content displayed in a mode corresponding to the mode is maintained. However, the content of the winning aim notification image 134 is changed from an image indicating that a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 should be aimed to an image indicating that a winning to the distributing winning device 36 should be aimed. The contents of the winning aim notification image 134 are the same when the second distribution execution mode is started.

  As described above, in the first distribution execution mode, the V winning prize detection sensor 69 basically detects a game ball. As shown in FIG. 9 (f), when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the variation display of the pattern in the third variation display area 133 is completed even in the middle of the first distribution execution mode. To do. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9D, the stop symbol of the third variation display area 133 is a symbol that forms a combination of reach symbols in the first variation display region 131 and the second variation display region 132. is there. That is, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is terminated with the winning symbol combination being stopped even if it is in the middle of the allocation execution mode. It will be. Thereby, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs.

  Thereafter, when the first distribution execution mode ends, an opening / closing execution mode occurs as shown in FIG. When the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the display effect corresponding to the start of the opening / closing execution mode is started in the state where the winning aim notification image 134 is displayed on the symbol display device 44. In the winning aim notification image 134, a special drawing through winning section 34, a distributing through winning section 35, a second operating section 33, a special electric winning apparatus 37, and the like are arranged in the vertical direction in the right area PA3 of the game area PA. The image corresponding to the distribution winning device 36 on a one-to-one basis is the actual installation of the special drawing through winning unit 34, the distributing through winning unit 35, the second operating unit 33, the special electric winning device 37, and the distributing winning device 36. The display content displayed in a mode corresponding to the mode is maintained. However, the content of the winning aim notification image 134 is changed from an image indicating that the winning to the distribution winning device 36 should be aimed to an image indicating that the winning to the special electricity winning device 37 should be aimed. The contents of the winning aim notification image 134 are the same when the V winning detection sensor 69 detects a game ball and the opening / closing execution mode occurs in the second distribution execution mode.

  On the other hand, when the target selected in the distribution determination process of the main MPU 92 is the second distribution execution mode, the second distribution execution mode is started in the distribution prize winning device 36 as shown in FIG. Is done. Even in this case, the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is continued. As already described, in the second allocation execution mode, basically, the V winning detection sensor 69 does not detect a game ball, so that the opening / closing execution mode does not basically occur after the end of the second allocation execution mode. In addition, the pattern variation display in the third variation display area 133 ends at the timing when the second distribution execution mode ends. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9E, the stop symbol in the third variation display area 133 is a combination of a symbol that forms a reach symbol combination in the first variation display region 131 and the second variation display region 132. Are different designs. That is, when the allocation execution mode ends without the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69, the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 ends without stopping the winning symbol combination. Become. Thereby, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the transition to the opening / closing execution mode does not occur. Even if the first distribution execution mode occurs, if the game winning ball detection is not detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the opening / closing execution mode does not occur, so that the winning symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state. Without this, the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is terminated.

  Here, even if the second allocation execution mode is executed in the allocation winning device 36 as shown in FIG. 9 (i), the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 as shown in FIG. 9 (j). It can happen to be detected. For example, in the second allocation execution mode, the allocation winning device 36 is first opened once in the allocation-side short period mode. A winning to the prize winning device 36 occurs, and the winning game ball remains on the upstream side of the branching path to the V winning path area 65c in the discharge path area 65b for some reason, and the switching piece 66 is set to the V guide position. It is conceivable that after reaching the branch position after being arranged, it is led to the V winning path area 65c. Such an event may occur due to a ball clogging or the like even when a game is played regularly, and may also occur due to an illegal act.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (j), when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, even if it is in the middle of the second distribution execution mode, the pattern in the third variation display area 133 of the symbol display device 44. The change display of is finished. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9F, the stop symbol in the third variation display area 133 is a combination of a symbol that forms a reach symbol combination in the first variation display region 131 and the second variation display region 132. Are different designs. That is, in the second distribution execution mode, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 44. Furthermore, the stop symbol in the third variation display area 133 is a symbol that is not included in the symbol to be displayed when the symbol variation display is performed in the third variation display region 133. The symbol is “E”. This symbol is a symbol that is stopped and displayed only when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the second distribution execution mode. This makes it possible to clearly notify the player and the game hall manager that a game ball has been detected by the V prize winning detection sensor 69 in spite of the second distribution execution mode.

  Thereafter, when the second distribution execution mode ends, the opening / closing execution mode occurs as shown in FIG. In the opening / closing execution mode, although the winning aim notification image 134 corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode as described above is displayed on the symbol display device 44, the display effect corresponding to the start of the opening / closing execution mode is started. Instead, the display mode of the stop symbol shown in FIG. 9E is maintained. This makes it possible to clearly notify that the opening / closing execution mode that has occurred from the second branch execution mode is being executed even when the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. Further, the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode generated from the second distribution execution mode is different from the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode generated from the first distribution execution mode.

  Hereinafter, the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode generated from the first distribution execution mode and the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode generated from the second distribution execution mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 11A shows an execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode generated from the first distribution execution mode, and FIG. 11B shows an execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode generated from the second distribution execution mode. FIG. 11A shows a period during which the opening / closing execution mode is executed, and FIG. 11A and 11B show a case where the upper limit number of winnings to the special electricity winning device 37 does not occur in each round game.

  First, an execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode generated from the first distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG.

  At the timing t1, the mode is changed to the opening / closing execution mode, and the opening of the special electric prize device 37 in the first round game is started at the timing t2 when the special electric opening period T1 has elapsed. In addition, the special electricity prize winning device 37 is closed at the timing t3 when the special electricity release period T2 has elapsed. Thereafter, the opening of the special prize winning device 37 in the second round game is started at the timing t4 when the first special electricity closing period T3 (specifically, 2 sec) has elapsed. Then, at the timing t5 to the timing t10, the closing of the special electricity winning device 37 accompanying the passage of the special electricity release period T2 and the opening of the special electricity winning device 37 accompanying the passage of the first special electricity closing period T3 are repeated.

  Thereafter, at the timing t11 when the special electricity release period T2 in the last round game has elapsed, the special electricity prize winning device 37 is closed and the ending effect is started. The current opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing t12 when the ending period T4 has elapsed.

  Next, an execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode generated from the second distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG.

  At the timing of t21, the opening and closing execution mode is entered, and the special electric prize winning device 37 in the first round game is played at the timing of t22, which is the timing when the same special electricity opening period T1 as in the situation triggered by the first distribution execution mode has elapsed. Opening is started. Also, the special prize winning device 37 is closed at the timing t23, which is the timing when the same special electricity release period T2 has elapsed as in the situation triggered by the first distribution execution mode.

  Thereafter, the opening of the special prize winning device 37 in the second round game is started at a timing t24, which is a timing at which a second special electricity closure period T5 (specifically 60 sec) longer than the first special electricity closure period T3 has elapsed. . Then, at the timing of t25 to t30, the closing of the special electricity winning device 37 accompanying the passage of the special electricity release period T2 and the opening of the special electricity winning device 37 accompanying the passage of the second special electricity closing period T5 are repeated.

  Thereafter, at the timing t31 when the special electricity release period T2 in the last round game has elapsed, the special electricity prize winning device 37 is closed and the ending effect is started. Then, the current opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing of t32, which is the timing when the same ending period T4 has elapsed as in the situation triggered by the first distribution execution mode.

  As described above, in the opening / closing execution mode generated with the second distribution execution mode as a trigger, the special electricity closing period between rounds is longer than the opening / closing execution mode generated with the first distribution execution mode as a trigger. In the opening / closing execution mode that is triggered by the second distribution execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 itself, that is, the symbol display device 44, the display light emitting unit 73, and the speaker unit 74 notifies that fact. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the fact during the opening / closing execution mode and to give the manager sufficient time to deal with the fact. Furthermore, when the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the second distribution execution mode due to fraud, it is possible to reduce the digestibility of the opening / closing execution mode, and the unit time for the fraud It is possible to reduce the amount of profits obtained per hit.

  In addition, the period during which the special prize winning device 37 is closed in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is longer than that of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode. Since the closed period is constant without depending on the situation where game balls are being fired, etc., opening and closing triggered by the second sort execution mode by lengthening such closed period It becomes possible to make the execution mode longer.

  Also, not only the ending period is lengthened and the opening / closing execution mode is not lengthened, but the special electricity closing period at the timing before the last round game is lengthened and the opening / closing execution mode is prolonged. It is planned. As a result, when the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is caused by an illegal act, the illegal act is dealt with at a stage before the game ball payout in the opening / closing execution mode is completed. It becomes possible to do.

  Further, the upper limit number and the special electricity release period of each round game are the same in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode and the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode occurs as a result of a regular game played instead of an illegal act, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode It is possible to pay out game balls equivalent to.

<About various processes executed by the main MPU 92>
Next, various processes executed to advance the game in the main MPU 92 will be described. The main MPU 92 is roughly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the main process, first, a power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is activated. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 94 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main MPU 92 is set (step S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase button provided in the power supply / launch control device 88 is manually operated (step S104), and it is determined whether or not the power failure flag of the main RAM 94 is set to “1”. (Step S105). Also, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored at the time of power-off, that is, the validity of the stored data ( Step S107).

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a game hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase button. Therefore, if the RAM erase button is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 94 is cleared as initialization of the main RAM 94. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase button has not been pressed, “1” is set in the power failure flag and the checksum is normal, and step S109 is executed without executing step S108. Proceed to In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 94 such as a power failure flag initialization is set to an initial value. Also, a payout initialization command indicating that the RAM of the payout control device 87 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout control device 87.

  Then, it progresses to the residual process of step S110-step S113. That is, the main MPU 92 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining processing, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the generation of timer interrupt processing (step S110). In addition, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed (step S111), and a variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is performed (step S112). In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 94, and the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is performed, and then the process of overwriting the read-out counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is performed (step S113). If the process of step S113 is performed, it will return to step S110 and will repeat the process of step S110-step S113.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is started repeatedly with a period of 4 msec.

  First, a power failure information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power outage monitoring board 95, and when the occurrence of a power outage is specified, the process during power outage is executed.

  Thereafter, a lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the distribution counter C3, and the general power random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing the process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the distribution counter C3, and the general-use random number counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, A process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value.

  Thereafter, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111 (step S203), and the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112 (step S204). Thereafter, a game stop determination process is executed (step S205). In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped. If the situation is to stop the progress of the game, the execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped. Thereafter, on the condition that the progress of the game is not stopped (step S206: NO), the processing after step S207 is executed.

  In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 37c, 56, 63, and 67 is executed. For example, when the information for switching the distribution inlet 61 of the distribution prize winning device 36 to the open state is set, output of a drive signal to the drive unit 63 for the distribution inlet is started, and the information should be switched to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the switching piece 66 of the distribution winning device 36 to the V guide position is set, the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 67 is started, and the information to be switched to the retracted position is set. If so, the output of the drive signal is stopped. When information for switching the special winning opening 37a of the special electric prize winning device 37 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 37c is started, and the information to be changed to the closed state is set. If so, the output of the drive signal is stopped. In addition, when the information for switching the guidance unit 52 of the second operating unit 33 to the guidance state is set, the output of the drive signal to the guide drive unit 56 is started, and the information to be switched to the non-guidance state is set. If it is, the output of the drive signal to the guide drive unit 56 is stopped.

  Thereafter, a reading process is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  Thereafter, a winning detection process is executed (step S209). In the winning detection process, the signals received from the various winning detection sensors 32a to 69 are read, and the general winning unit 31, the first operating unit 32, the second operating unit 33, the special-purpose through winning unit 34, and the distribution. The process which specifies the presence or absence of a prize to the through prize winning unit 35, the distribution prize winning device 36 and the special electric prize winning device 37 is executed.

  Thereafter, a timer update process for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 94 is executed (step S210). In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is handled in an integrated manner. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  Thereafter, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed (step S211). In the fraud detection process, by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the game stop setting is made in step S205 in the next timer interrupt process, An affirmative determination is made in step S206.

  Thereafter, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (step S212). In a situation where the launch operation is continued with respect to the launch operation device 28, as already described, one game ball is launched in 0.6 seconds so as to have a predetermined launch cycle.

  Thereafter, as input status monitoring processing, disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor 33a to 59b and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading processing in step S208 (step S208). S213).

  After that, special figure special electric control processing is performed to perform game times execution control in the special figure display unit 42a, display control of the distribution display unit 42c, execution control of the distribution execution mode, and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode ( Step S214). In addition, whether or not the guidance unit 52 of the second actuating unit 33 is in the guidance state is determined for guidance, and is usually used for switching the guidance unit 52 between the guidance state and the non-guidance state. Electric control processing is executed (step S215). In the ordinary power control process, if the support through period is not the allocation valid period, the allocation execution mode, and the opening / closing execution mode, the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is supported. The display control of the general map display unit 43a and the drive control of the guidance unit 52 are performed according to the contents. If the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the display control and guidance of the general map display unit 43a with the content corresponding to the high frequency support mode. Drive control of the unit 52 is performed. Further, in the ordinary power transmission control process, if the winning through period winning portion 35 for allocation is in any of the valid period, the allocation execution mode, and the opening / closing execution mode, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 is frequently supported until immediately before that. Regardless of whether the mode is set or not, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode. This prevents the guidance unit 52 from obstructing the flow of the game ball toward the distribution winning device 36 in the distribution execution mode or the flow of the game ball toward the special electricity winning device 37 in the opening / closing execution mode. It becomes possible.

  Thereafter, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S214 to step S215, setting of output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information on the special figure side in the special figure hold display section 42b, and the hold information on the normal drawing side Output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number in the general-purpose hold display unit 43b is set (step S216). Further, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S214 to step S215, setting of output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 42a and output information for updating the display content of the distribution display unit 42c. Setting and setting of output information for updating the display content of the general map display unit 43a are performed (step S216).

  Thereafter, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 87 are confirmed, and a payout state reception process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S217). Also, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S218). In addition, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed (step S219).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after executing the processing of steps S207 to S219, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Special Figure Special Electric Control Process>
Next, the special figure special power control process executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special figure special electric control process, when winning to the first operating part 32 or the second operating part 33 occurs, a process for acquiring the special figure side holding information is executed, and the special figure side holding is performed. When the information is stored, whether or not the hold information is determined is determined, and further, a process for performing an effect for playing a game is executed using the determination as to whether or not the information is stored. Further, when the result of the determination is a winning result, after the game round effect is executed, a distribution valid period of the distribution through winning unit 35 is generated, and the distribution through winning unit 35 is allocated during the winning effective period. When winning is won, a process of shifting to the distribution execution mode is executed. Then, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the distribution execution mode, a process of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is executed after the distribution execution mode is completed.

  Specifically, in the special figure special power control process, first, the special figure side hold information acquisition process is executed (step S301). In the special figure side hold information acquisition process, in the situation where the number of special figure side hold information stored in the special figure hold area 122 is less than the upper limit storage number, to the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33 In the first special figure reservation area 123 in the first area 123a to the fourth area 123d in the first special figure reservation area 123, the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the type counter C2 are used as reservation information on the special illustration side. It stores in the area where the digestion order is early among the areas where the hold information is not stored. In addition, when the reserved information on the special figure side is acquired, the data for updating the display content of the special figure holding display unit 42b in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved information on the special figure side this time. Set up. Further, when the hold information on the special figure side is acquired, a hold increase command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103. As a result, the image for informing the number of reserved information stored on the special figure side in the symbol display device 44 is updated in correspondence with the new acquisition of the special figure side reserved information.

  Thereafter, the special figure special power address table stored in the main ROM 93 is read (step S302). In the special figure special power address table, a start address of a program for executing processing corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is set. The special figure special power counter is a counter for the main MPU 92 to specify the processing contents to be executed in the special figure special electric control process.

  The special figure special electric control process includes a process for controlling the effects for the game times, a process for controlling the winning validity period of the distribution through winning unit 35, and a process for controlling the distribution execution mode. And a process for controlling the open / close execution mode. In this case, as a process for controlling the effect for the game times, a special figure change start process (step S305) which is a process for starting the effect for the game times and an effect for the game times are advanced. And a special figure changing process (step S307), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, is set. In addition, a distribution waiting process (step S308) is set as a process for controlling the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35. Further, as a process for controlling the distribution execution mode, a process for starting distribution (step S309) which is a process for controlling the opening of the distribution execution mode and a period after the opening of the distribution execution mode are controlled. The process for distribution (step S310) which is a process for performing this is set. Also, as a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode, a special electricity start process (step S311) which is a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode opening, and a process for controlling the open state of the special electricity prize winning device 37 Special electric power opening process (step S312), special electric power closing apparatus 37 processing (step S313) for controlling the closed state of the special electric prize winning device 37, opening / closing execution mode ending and opening / closing execution mode end A special electric power ending process (step S314), which is a process for controlling the transition of the gaming state, is set.

  The special figure special electricity counter can take values from “0” to “9”, and each value from “0” to “9” corresponds to the start address SA0 to SA9 of each process (step S305 to step S314). ing. Specifically, when the value of the special figure special counter is “0”, the special figure variation start process (step S305) is executed, and when the value of the special figure special electric counter is “1”. When the figure changing process (step S306) is an execution target and the value of the special figure special power counter is “2”, the special figure finalizing process (step S307) is the execution target, and the special figure special electric power counter value is “ If the value is “3”, the distribution waiting process (step S308) is an execution target. If the value of the special figure special power counter is “4”, the distribution start process (step S309) is an execution target. When the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “5”, the distribution process (step S310) is executed, and when the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “6”, the special electricity start process (step S311). Is the execution target, When the value of the special figure special counter is “7”, the special electric release opening process (step S312) is executed, and when the special figure special electric counter value is “8”, the special electric charge closing process (step S313). Is the execution target, and when the value of the special figure special power counter is “9”, the special power termination process (step S314) is the execution target.

  In the special figure special power control process, after reading the special figure special electric address table (step S302), the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter is obtained from the special figure special electric address table (step S303). The process jumps to the process indicated by the start address (step S304). Hereinafter, special figure change start processing (step S305), special figure change processing (step S306), special figure finalizing processing (step S307), distribution standby processing (step S308), distribution start processing (step S309) ), The distribution process (step S310), the special electricity start process (step S311), the special electricity release process (step S312), the special electricity closure process (step S313), and the special electricity end process (step S314) will be described individually.

<Special map start processing>
First, the special figure variation start process of step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special figure variation start process, the data setting process is executed (step S402) on the condition that the number of hold information on the special figure side is one or more (step S401: YES). In the data setting process, the data stored in the first area 123a of the special figure holding area 122 is moved to the special drawing execution area 124. Thereafter, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the special figure holding area 122 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 123a to 123d to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area 123a, and the second area 123b → The data in each area is shifted such that the first area 123a, the third area 123c → the second area 123b, and the fourth area 123d → the third area 123c. In the data setting process, data setting is performed so that the display content of the special figure hold display section 42b is updated in accordance with the current decrease in the number of hold information on the special figure side. In the data setting process, a hold reduction command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103. As a result, the image for informing the number of reserved information stored on the special symbol side in the symbol display device 44 is updated in correspondence with the decrease in the special information side reserved information.

  After the data setting process is executed, a validity determination process is executed (step S403). In the success / failure determination process, if the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode, the success / failure table for the low probability mode is read from the main ROM 93. Read from. After the success / failure table is read, the information for success / failure determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read from the hold information stored in the execution area 124 for the special figure, and the read numerical information is the above-described success / failure table. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information set as the hit result.

  If the result of the determination process is a hit result (step S404: YES), the type determination process is executed (step S405). In the type determination process, the type table is read from the main ROM 93, the type determination information, that is, the numerical value information acquired from the type counter C2, is read from the hold information stored in the special drawing execution area 124, and the read numerical value It is determined whether the information corresponds to the low probability result or the high probability result set in the type table.

  After executing the type determination process, “1” is set in the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the type of the winning result specified in the type determination process (step S406). Specifically, “1” is set to the low-accuracy flag when the low-accuracy result is supported, and “1” is set to the high-accuracy flag when the high-accuracy result is supported. . In the following description, the process for determining whether or not the result is various hit results is performed by determining whether or not “1” is set in the corresponding flag of the main RAM 94. In addition, when “1” is set in step S406, the game state transition process is executed when the distribution execution mode without the transition to the opening / closing execution mode ends or when the opening / closing execution mode ends. Cleared to "0".

  After the hit result flag setting process is executed, a stop result setting process for the hit result is executed (step S407). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 42a in the current game round is specified from the stop result table for hit results stored in the main ROM 93 in advance, The specified information is stored in the main RAM 94. In the stop result table for the winning results, the types of the pattern stop modes that are stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 42a are set to be different for each type of the winning results. The information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of the hit result specified in the above is stored in the main RAM 94. Note that the pattern stop mode may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each winning result, or a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some of the hit results. The method of selecting the stop result for the hit result in which the stop modes of a plurality of types of patterns are set is arbitrary. For example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the type counter C2.

  If the result of the determination process is not a winning result (step S404: NO), a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step S408). Specifically, the information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 42a in the current game round is specified from the stop result table for the detachment result stored in the main ROM 93 in advance. The specified information is stored in the main RAM 94. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the winning result.

  After executing any of the stop result setting processes, the variable display period specifying process is executed (step S409). In the process for specifying the variable display period, a process for specifying the variable display period of the game times is executed. Specifically, first, the table for the variable display period corresponding to the support mode in the current game round and corresponding to the results of the success / failure determination process and the type determination process is read from the main ROM 93. These variable display time tables are set so that a longer variable display period is more easily selected when the result of the success / failure determination process is a hit result than when the result is a miss result, and the result of the type determination process is higher. If the result is a positive result, a longer variable display period is set to be easier to select than if the result is a low probability result. If there are many people with a small number, the longer variable display period is set to be easier to select, and if the result of the success / failure determination process is a hit result, the high frequency support mode is the low frequency support mode. A longer display period is set to be easier to select than the case, and if the result of the success / failure determination process is an outlier result, the low frequency support mode is the higher frequency support mode. It is set more likely to be selected longer change display period than that. And by setting the table for the variable display period in this way, the average value of the variable display period becomes longer when the result of the success / failure determination process is a hit result than when it is a miss result, If the result of the type determination process is a high probability result, the average value of the variable display period will be longer than if the result is a low probability result. If the number of pending information is small, the average value of the variable display period is longer than when there are many, and if the result of the success / failure determination process is a hit result, the high frequency support mode is the low frequency support mode. If the average value of the variable display period is longer than the case, and the result of the acceptance / rejection determination process is an outlier result, the low frequency support mode is more variable than the high frequency support mode. The average value of the period is longer. Note that the average value of the variable display period as a whole is longer in the low frequency support mode than in the high frequency support mode. Although detailed description is omitted, the effect for the game times in the symbol display device 44 is executed such that the game times having a longer variable display period increase the player's expectation. For example, the number of performance characters appearing in games with a longer variation display period is greater.

  Information on the variable display period specified in the variable display period specifying process is set in a timer counter provided in the main RAM 94. When the variable display period information is set in the timer counter, the timer update process (step S210) in step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is executed until the value of the timer counter reaches “0”. Subtracted.

  Thereafter, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S410). The change command includes information on the change display period specified in step S409. The type command includes information on game results (results of success / failure determination processing and results of type determination processing).

  Thereafter, after the fluctuation display table for the special figure display unit 42a is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S411), the special figure display unit 42a starts the variable display of the pattern (step S412). The variation display table for the special figure display unit 42a is a table in which a variation display pattern of a pattern when the variation display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display unit 42a is determined in advance. When the variation display of the pattern is executed in the special figure display unit 42a, the same variation display table is used regardless of the result of the success / failure determination process and the result of the type determination process. When the variation display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display unit 42a, the variation display of the pattern by the predetermined pattern is repeated, but the variation display table for the special figure display unit 42a has the pattern of the pattern by the predetermined pattern. Control data for one round in the variable display is set. Therefore, when the variable display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display unit 42a, the variable display table for the special figure display unit 42a is repeatedly used until the variable display period determined in step S409 elapses.

  Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S413). Since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is “0”, the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the addition target by adding 1 is the special figure fluctuation in-process ( "1" corresponding to step S306).

<Processing contents of sound-side MPU 103>
As described above, the information of the fluctuation display period read out as described above is set in the fluctuation command and transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103. Hereinafter, a processing configuration for performing execution control of effects for game times in the sound light side MPU 103 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interruption process repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 4 msec) in the sound light side MPU 103.

  First, a table setting process for performing a process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 92 is executed (step S501). FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the table setting process. When the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 92 (step S601: YES), a game result storing process is executed (step S602). Specifically, from the information contained in the type command, the result of the success / failure determination process and the type determination process determined by the main MPU 92 at the start of the current game round is specified, and the specified information is Write to the side RAM 105.

  Then, the effect lottery process for determining the content of the effect for game times is performed (step S603). In the effect lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to make a notice display on the symbol display device 44 in the current game round. The notice display is a situation in which the symbol variation display is performed in all of the first variation display region 131, the second variation display region 132, and the third variation display region 133 in the symbol display device 44, or the first variation display region. In the situation in which the symbol variation display is stopped in 131 but the symbol variation display is performed in both the second variation display region 132 and the third variation display region 133, the display of the symbol display device 44 is displayed in advance. This is a display effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a winning result will occur in the current game round, in other words, the degree of expectation that the reach variation display will be executed in the current game round. As a mode for a notice display, a mode in which the background image of the symbol display device 44 is used as a background image for a notice display, a mode in which a character image for a notice display is displayed, and a type of a symbol that is variably displayed are used for a notice display Examples include types.

  In the effect lottery process, the effect lottery table corresponding to the variation command and type command received this time is read from the main ROM 93, and the value of the lottery counter whose value is periodically updated in the main RAM 94 is read. Then, the value of the lottery counter is checked against the current effect lottery table to determine whether or not the notice display is executed and the kind of notice display to be executed. In this case, the game times corresponding to the winning results are set to have a higher probability of the notice display than the game times corresponding to the missed results. In addition, a game notice corresponding to a winning result is more likely to be selected as a type of notice display with a higher expectation level of reach reach display than a game corresponding to a missed result. In addition, a game notice corresponding to a high probability result is more likely to be selected than a game corresponding to a low probability result, and a type of notice display with a high expectation level for the reach variation display to be executed. In addition, the longer the game display variation display period, the higher the probability that the notification display will be generated, and the higher the expectation that the reach variation display will be executed, the easier it is to select the notification display.

  After the effect lottery process is executed, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S604). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is an outlier result, a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established in the first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132 in the symbol display device 44 is obtained. Corresponding information is determined as information on the stop result of the current game round. In this case, since the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 does not occur after the game round ends, not only the first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132 but also the third variation when the game round ends. Also in the display area 133, the symbol variation display is terminated. Therefore, as the information of the stop result in this case, not only the first change display area 131 and the second change display area 132 but also the third change display area 133 determines the type of symbols to be stopped. The combination of stop symbols in the first variation display region 131, the second variation display region 132, and the third variation display region 133 in the case of an outlier result is determined by lottery so as not to be a combination of reach symbols and the same symbols. Is done.

  Further, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a low probability result, a combination of the same even number symbols in the first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132 in the symbol display device 44. Information corresponding to the stop result in which is established is determined as information on the stop result of the current game round. In this case, after the game round is over and the winning valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 is started, the symbols are displayed in the third variation display area 133 in a state where the combination of reach symbols is formed by the same even symbols. Will be displayed. The type of reach symbol combination based on the even symbols is determined by lottery. In addition, if the stop result of the current game round is a highly accurate result, the stop result in which a combination of the same odd number of symbols is established in the first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132 in the symbol display device 44 is obtained. Corresponding information is determined as information on the stop result of the current game round. In this case, after the game round is ended and the winning effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35 is started, the symbols are displayed in the third variation display area 133 in a state where the combination of reach symbols is formed by the same odd symbols. Will be displayed. The kind of reach symbol combination by this odd symbol is determined by lottery.

  In addition, even if it is a low probability result, a combination of reach symbols with the same odd number of symbols can be formed, and even if it is a high probability result, a combination of reach symbols with the same even number of symbols It is good also as a structure which can be formed. In this case, it is possible to select a odd number of symbols as a combination of reach symbols more easily in the case of a high probability result than in the case of a low probability result. It is possible to notify the degree of expectation that the result is a hit result. In addition, an odd number of symbols is not selected as a combination of reach symbols when the result is a low probability, while an even number or odd number of symbols is selected as a combination of reach symbols when a result is a high probability of hit. It is good. In addition, instead of the configuration in which the combination of the reach design with the odd number of designs corresponds to the high probability result and the combination of the reach design with the even number of the symbols corresponds to the low probability result, the symbol “3” or the symbol “7” is used. A combination of reach symbols with some symbols such as the above corresponds to a high probability result, and a combination of reach symbols with other symbols may correspond to a low probability result.

  Thereafter, a control table reading process corresponding to the execution contents of the effect in the current game round is executed (step S605). In this process, information on the variable display period is specified from the contents of the variable command received this time, information on the variable display period, information on the game result specified in step S602, and the effect lottery in step S603 A control table corresponding to the combination of the process lottery result information and the stop result information determined in step S 604 is read from the sound light side ROM 104 and written to the sound light side RAM 105. In the control table, the content of the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 corresponding to the current game turn effect and the content of the sound output control of the speaker unit 74 corresponding to the current game time effect are set. Accordingly, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 74 are performed according to the control table.

  Thereafter, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S606). The variation pattern command includes information on the variable display period of the game time that is the start target, information on the combination of stop symbols, information on whether or not to perform the advance display, and the execution target when the advance display is executed. Information on the type of notice display. Upon receiving the variation pattern command, the display-side MPU 113 starts display control for executing an effect for game times in the symbol display device 44.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), after executing the table setting process, a command transmission process is executed (step S502). In the command transmission process, in the situation where the control table is read in the sound side RAM 105, the command of the type set in the control table when the command transmission timing set in the control table is reached. Is transmitted to the display-side MPU 113.

  Thereafter, the light emission control process is executed (step S503), and the sound output control process is executed (step S504). In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 is performed according to the table read to the sound light side RAM 105 in the table setting process in step S501. In the sound output control process, the sound output control of the speaker unit 74 is performed according to the table read to the sound light side RAM 105 in the table setting process in step S501. Thereafter, pointer update processing is executed (step S505). In the pointer update process, information is set for updating the data to be referred to in the table read out in the table setting process in step S501 to the data corresponding to the next control process.

<Processing content of display MPU 113>
Next, a description will be given of a processing configuration for performing execution control of effects for game times on the display side MPU 113. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process that is repeatedly activated by the display side MPU 113 at a predetermined cycle, specifically, at a cycle of 20 msec.

  In the V interrupt process, when a command is received from the sound light side MPU 103 (step S701: YES), a display pattern table corresponding to the received command is read from the display side ROM 114 and written to the display side RAM 115 (step S702). . For example, when a variation pattern command is received from the sound light side MPU 103, a display pattern table of a type corresponding to the variation pattern command is read from the display side ROM 114 and written into the display side RAM 115. This display pattern table includes the variable display period in the current game round, the type of combination of stop symbols, the presence / absence of execution of the advance display, and the type of advance display to be executed when the advance display is executed. It corresponds to the combination. Therefore, display control is executed by the display side MPU 113 according to the display pattern table, so that an effect for game times is executed by the symbol display device 44 over the variable display period determined by the main side MPU 92. When it is decided that the sound light side MPU 103 is to execute the notice display, the kind of notice display determined by the sound light side MPU 103 is executed on the symbol display device 44 in the middle of the effect for the game times. Is done. In addition, when the effect for the game round is ended, the combination of stop symbols determined by the sound light side MPU 103 is displayed on the symbol display device 44.

  If a negative determination is made in step S701, or if the process of step S702 is executed, a pointer update process is executed (step S703). In the pointer update process, information setting is performed to update the data to be referred to in the display pattern table read in step S702 to the data corresponding to the current control process. Thereafter, task processing is executed (step S704). In the task processing, a parameter necessary for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing on the symbol display device 44 is calculated. Thereafter, a drawing list output process is executed (step S705). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing time on the symbol display device 44 is created, and the created drawing list is provided on the display control board 112. To a VDP (not shown). In this case, in the drawing list, an image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is a drawing target, and parameter information updated in the task process is set together. The VDP creates drawing data in a frame area of a VRAM (not shown) according to this drawing list, thereby displaying an image for one frame on the symbol display device 44.

<Special map change processing>
Next, the special figure changing process executed in step S306 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the variation display period of the current game times in the special figure display unit 42a has not elapsed (step S801: NO), and when the display content update timing of the special figure display unit 42a is reached (step S802: YES) The data setting for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 42a is performed by referring to the fluctuation display table for the special figure display unit 42a read in step S411 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 15) ( Step S803). Thereby, the display content of the pattern in the special figure display part 42a is updated to the display content of the next order.

  The mode at the start of the display of the variation of the pattern in the special figure display unit 42a and the update mode of the display of the variation of the pattern are performed in a certain mode regardless of the processing result of the success / failure determination process and the processing result of the type determination process. The game is performed in a certain manner regardless of the contents of the game-playing effects in the symbol display device 44. For example, when a predetermined plurality of update timings occur, the display content of the pattern goes around once and the display pattern in a constant display order is repeatedly performed. When the variable display period has elapsed, the display pattern No matter which order is displayed, the stop result determined at the start of the game round is displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display unit 42a.

  On the other hand, when the variable display period has elapsed (step S801: YES), the information on the pattern stop mode of the special figure display unit 42a stored in the main side RAM 94 at the start of the game round is read (step S804). Thereby, the variation display of the pattern is stopped in a state where the pattern corresponding to the game result of the current game time is displayed on the special figure display unit 42a. Regardless of whether or not the pattern that is stopped and displayed in the special figure display unit 42a is the winning validity period, the distribution execution mode, and the open / close execution mode of the distribution through winning unit 35, the special figure display unit 42a This is maintained until the next display of the variation of the pattern is started. Further, information on the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S805). Thereby, the measurement of the last stop period is started.

  Thereafter, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S806). When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the final stop command from the main side MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 103 transmits the final stop command to the display side MPU 113 in the other process of step S628 in the table setting process (FIG. 17). When the display side MPU 113 receives the final stop command from the sound light side MPU 103, in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), the display side MPU 113 stops and displays the combination of stop symbols in the current game round over the final stop period. The display pattern table for reading is read out. Thereby, the combination of stop symbols corresponding to the current game time is stopped and displayed in the symbol display device 44 over the final stop period.

  Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S807). Since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure fluctuation process is executed is “1”, the value of the special figure special electricity counter corresponds to the special figure finalizing process (step S307) by adding 1. “2”.

<Processing during special figure determination>
Next, the special figure determination process executed in step S307 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the final stop period has elapsed (step S901: YES), and the game result of the current game round is a missed result (step S902: NO), the special figure special electricity counter value is cleared to “0”. (Step S903). As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

  When the final stop period has elapsed (step S901: YES) and the game result of the current game round is a winning result (step S902: YES), the variable display table for the distribution display unit 42c is displayed. After reading from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S904), the distribution display unit 42c starts to display the variation of the pattern (step S905). The variation display table for the distribution display unit 42c is a table in which a variation display pattern of the pattern when the variation display of the pattern is performed in the distribution display unit 42c is determined in advance. When the variation display of the pattern is executed in the distribution display unit 42c, the same variation display table is used. When the variation display of the pattern is performed in the distribution display unit 42c, the variation display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern is repeated. However, the variation display table for the distribution display unit 42c includes Control data for one round in the variable display is set. Therefore, when the variation display of the pattern is performed on the distribution display unit 42c, the variation display table for the distribution display unit 42c is repeatedly used until the distribution execution mode ends.

  Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S906). When the special figure determination process is executed, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “2”, so that the value of the special figure special electricity counter that is the addition target by adding 1 is the distribution standby process ( “3” corresponding to step S308).

  Thereafter, a distribution display start command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S907). When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the distribution display start command from the main side MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S607 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and displays the control table corresponding to the distribution display start command. Reading is performed from the light side ROM 104 to the sound light side RAM 105 (step S608). In the control table, the light emission control data of the display light emitting unit 73 and the sound output control data of the speaker unit 74 during the winning validity period of the distribution through winning unit 35 are set. By referring to the control table, the display light emitting unit 73 executes a light emission effect corresponding to the winning effective period, and the speaker unit 74 executes a sound output effect corresponding to the winning effective period. Also, a distribution display start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S609). When the display-side MPU 113 receives the distribution display start command from the sound light-side MPU 103, the display-side MPU 113 reads a display pattern table for continuing the reach variation display during the winning valid period in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18). . Thereby, in the symbol display device 44, the variation display of the symbols is continued in the third variation display region 133 in a state where the combination of the reach symbols stopped and displayed when the effect for the game round is terminated. . In addition, as described above, the symbol display device 44 displays the winning aim notification image 134 for notifying that the winning of the distribution through winning portion 35 should be aimed.

<Distribution standby processing>
Next, the distribution standby process executed in step S308 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the distribution standby process, first, an update process of the distribution display unit 42c is executed (step S1001). In the update process, when it is the update timing of the display contents of the distribution display unit 42c, refer to the variation display table for the distribution display unit 42c read in step S904 in the special figure determination process (FIG. 20). Thus, data setting for updating the display contents of the distribution display unit 42c is performed. Thereby, the display content of the pattern in the distribution display part 42c is updated to the display content of the next order.

  The mode at the start of the display of the variation of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c and the update mode of the display of the variation of the pattern are the type of the winning result in the immediately preceding game round, and the duration of the variation display of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c. This is performed in a certain manner regardless of whether the symbol display device 44 is in a certain manner. For example, when a predetermined plurality of update timings occur, the display content of the pattern goes around once and a display pattern having a constant display order is repeatedly performed. When the distribution execution mode ends, the display is performed. Regardless of the order in which the patterns are displayed, a stop result corresponding to the game result in the distribution execution mode is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the distribution display unit 42c.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 has occurred (step S1002). Here, the determination as to whether or not a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 has occurred occurs only in step S1002. As a result, the winning validity period to the distribution through winning portion 35 is generated only when the game round corresponding to the winning result is completed.

  If a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 has occurred (step S1002: YES), the value of the distribution counter C3 is stored in the distribution execution area 125 (step S1003). Then, the distribution determination process is executed using the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 (step S1004). In the distribution determination process, the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 and the numerical information set as the first distribution execution mode in the distribution table. It is determined whether it matches any of the above.

  If the result of the distribution determination process is the first distribution execution mode (step S1005: YES), “1” is set to the first distribution execution flag provided in the main RAM 94 (step S1006). The first distribution execution flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 92 which one of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode should be executed as the distribution execution mode. When the value of the first distribution execution flag is “1”, it is specified that the first distribution execution mode should be executed. When the value of the first distribution execution flag is “0” Specifies that the second distribution execution mode should be executed. Note that the value of the first distribution execution flag is cleared to “0” when the distribution execution mode that is not accompanied by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode ends or when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Thereafter, the first distribution command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S1007). When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the first distribution command from the main side MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S610 in the table setting process (FIG. 17) and displays the control table corresponding to the first distribution command. Data is read from the light side ROM 104 to the sound light side RAM 105 (step S611). In the control table, the light emission control data of the display light emitting unit 73 and the sound output control data of the speaker unit 74 in the first distribution execution mode are set. By referring to the control table, the display light emitting unit 73 executes a light emission effect corresponding to the first distribution execution mode, and the speaker unit 74 executes a sound output effect corresponding to the first distribution execution mode. Is done. Note that the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the first distribution execution mode are different from the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the second distribution execution mode. Further, the first distribution command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S612). When the display-side MPU 113 receives the first distribution command from the sound light-side MPU 103, the display pattern for continuing the reach variation display in the first distribution execution mode in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18). Read the table. Thereby, in the symbol display device 44, the variation display of the symbols is continued in the third variation display region 133 in a state where the combination of the reach symbols stopped and displayed when the effect for the game round is terminated. . Further, as described above, the symbol display device 44 displays the winning aim notification image 134 for notifying that the winning of the distribution winning device 36 should be aimed. In addition, the symbol display device 44 displays an image for allowing the player to recognize that the first distribution execution mode is the current execution target among the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the result of the distribution determination process is the second distribution execution mode (step S1005: NO), the second distribution command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S1008). When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the second distribution command from the main side MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S613 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and displays the control table corresponding to the second distribution command. Reading is performed from the light side ROM 104 to the sound light side RAM 105 (step S614). In the control table, the light emission control data of the display light emitting unit 73 and the sound output control data of the speaker unit 74 in the second distribution execution mode are set. By referring to the control table, the display light emitting unit 73 executes a light emission effect corresponding to the second distribution execution mode, and the speaker unit 74 executes a sound output effect corresponding to the second distribution execution mode. Is done. Note that the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the second distribution execution mode are different from the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the first distribution execution mode. Further, the second distribution command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S615). When the display-side MPU 113 receives the second distribution command from the sound light-side MPU 103, the display pattern for continuing the reach variation display in the second distribution execution mode in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18). Read the table. Thereby, in the symbol display device 44, the variation display of the symbols is continued in the third variation display region 133 in a state where the combination of the reach symbols stopped and displayed when the effect for the game round is terminated. . Further, as described above, the symbol display device 44 displays the winning aim notification image 134 for notifying that the winning of the distribution winning device 36 should be aimed. Further, the symbol display device 44 displays an image for allowing the player to recognize that the second distribution execution mode is the current execution target among the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. Is done.

  Thereafter, information on the distribution opening period (for example, 3 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1009). Thereby, measurement of the opening period for distribution is started. Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S1010). Since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the distribution standby process is executed is “3”, the value of the special figure special electricity counter corresponds to the distribution start process (step S309) by adding 1. “4”.

<Process for starting distribution>
Next, the distribution start process executed in step S309 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the distribution start process, update processing of the distribution display unit 42c is first executed (step S1101). The processing content of the update processing is the same as the processing content of step S1001 in the distribution standby processing (FIG. 21).

  In the distribution start process, the distribution opening period has elapsed (step S1102: YES), and “1” is set in the first distribution execution flag of the main RAM 94 (step S1102). S1103: YES), “1” is set to the open / close count counter SOC provided in the main RAM 94, and “10” is set to the winning counter PC provided in the main RAM 94 (Step S1104). The open / close count counter SOC is a counter for the main MPU 92 to specify the number of times the distribution entrance 61 of the distribution prize winning device 36 is opened and closed in the current distribution execution mode. The winning counter PC is a counter for the main side MPU 92 to specify the remaining number of the distribution side upper limit number in the current distribution execution mode. Further, the first distribution release period (specifically 29 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1105).

  On the other hand, if the distribution opening period has elapsed (step S1102: YES) and the value of the first distribution execution flag in the main RAM 94 is “0” (step S1103: NO), the main “2” is set to the open / close count counter SOC of the side RAM 94 and “10” is set to the winning counter PC of the main RAM 94 (step S1106). Further, the second distribution release period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1107).

  When the process of step S1105 or step S1107 is executed, a release setting process for distribution is executed (step S1108). In the opening setting process, “1” is set in the register corresponding to the distribution entrance driving unit 63 in the main MPU 92. Thereby, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the distribution inlet drive unit 63 is started to switch the distribution inlet 61 to the open state. . In this case, after the process of step S1105 is performed, the distribution inlet 61 is opened in the distribution-side long-term mode, and after the process of step S1107 is performed, the distribution-side short-term mode is performed. The distribution inlet 61 is opened.

  Thereafter, a distribution release command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S1109). When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the distribution release command from the main side MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S616 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and sets the control table corresponding to the distribution light release command to the sound light side. Data is read from the ROM 104 to the sound light side RAM 105 (step S617). In the control table, the light emission control data of the display light emitting unit 73 and the sound output control data of the speaker unit 74 after the distribution opening period has elapsed in the distribution execution mode are set. By referring to the control table, the display light emitting unit 73 executes the corresponding light emission effect after the distribution opening period in the distribution execution mode has elapsed, and the speaker unit 74 performs the distribution in the distribution execution mode. The corresponding sound output effect is executed after the opening period has elapsed. Note that these light emission effects and sound output effects differ between the case of the first distribution execution mode and the case of the second distribution execution mode. In addition, a distribution release command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S618). When the display side MPU 113 receives a distribution release command from the sound light side MPU 103, the display side MPU 113 reads a display pattern table for continuing the reach variation display in the distribution execution mode in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18). . Thereby, in the symbol display device 44, the variation display of the symbols is continued in the third variation display region 133 in a state where the combination of the reach symbols stopped and displayed when the effect for the game round is terminated. . Further, as described above, the symbol display device 44 displays the winning aim notification image 134 for notifying that the winning of the distribution winning device 36 should be aimed. Further, the symbol display device 44 displays an image for allowing the player to recognize the current execution target in the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. Further, the symbol display device 44 displays an image for allowing the player to recognize that the distribution entrance 61 is open.

  Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S1110). Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the distribution start process is executed is “4”, the value of the special figure special electric power counter corresponds to the distribution process (step S310) by adding “1”. 5 ".

<Processing for sorting>
Next, the distribution process executed in step S310 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the distribution process, update processing of the distribution display unit 42c is first executed (step S1201). The processing content of the update processing is the same as the processing content of step S1001 in the distribution standby processing (FIG. 21).

  In the distribution process, on the condition that the switching piece 66 of the distribution winning device 36 is switched from the retracted position to the V guide position (step S1202: YES), the register corresponding to the switching piece 66 in the main MPU 92 is stored. “1” is set (step S1203). Thereby, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 67 is started to switch the switching piece 66 to the V guide position. As described above, the timing at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guide position is the timing at which a predetermined period (eg, 3 sec) has elapsed since the opening of the sorting inlet 61 was first started in the sorting execution mode.

  In the distribution process, a register corresponding to the switching piece 66 in the main MPU 92 is provided on the condition that it is time to return the switching piece 66 of the distribution winning device 36 from the V guide position to the retracted position (step S1204: YES). Is cleared to “0” (step S1205). Thereby, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 67 is stopped to switch the switching piece 66 to the retracted position. As described above, the timing at which the switching piece 66 is returned to the retracted position is the timing at which the V induction continuation period (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed since the switching piece 66 was switched to the V induction position.

  In the distribution process, on the condition that the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36 (step S1206: YES), the V winning flag provided in the main RAM 94 is set to “1”. "Is set (step S1207). The V winning flag is a flag for the main side MPU 92 to specify that the game ball has been detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, and the V winning detection sensor 69 is already set to “1”. When a game ball is detected, the state where “1” is set is maintained.

  Thereafter, the V winning command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S1208). When receiving the V winning command from the main MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S619 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and sends a control table corresponding to the V winning command from the sound light side ROM 104. The data is read into the sound light side RAM 105 (step S620). In the control table, the light emission control data of the display light emitting unit 73 and the sound output control data of the speaker unit 74 after the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 are set. By referring to the control table, the display light emitting unit 73 executes a light emission effect corresponding to the occurrence of the V prize, and the speaker unit 74 executes a sound output effect corresponding to the occurrence of the V prize.

  Further, the V winning command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S621). When the display-side MPU 113 receives a V-winning command from the sound-side MPU 103, the display-side MPU 113 notifies the V-winning detection sensor 69 that a game ball has been detected in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18). Read the display pattern table. In this case, as the display pattern table, the first display pattern table corresponding to the occurrence of the V winning in the first distribution execution mode and the second corresponding to the occurrence of the V winning in the second distribution execution mode. And a display pattern table. When the first display pattern table is read, as shown in FIG. 9 (D), the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach symbol combination in the first variable display region 131 and the second variable display region 132 are used. The symbol display device 44 is controlled so that the symbol is stopped and displayed in the third variation display area 133. In addition, an image for notifying that a V prize has occurred is displayed on the symbol display device 44 separately from the symbols in the variable display areas 131 to 133.

  On the other hand, when the second display pattern table is read, as shown in FIG. 9F, the symbols forming the reach symbol combination in the first variation display region 131 and the second variation display region 132, and Are symbols that are not included in the symbols to be displayed when symbols are displayed in the third variation display area 133 so that the symbols that are not included in the third variation display region 133 are stopped and displayed in the third variation display area 133 The display of the device 44 is controlled. In addition, an image for notifying that a V prize has occurred is displayed on the symbol display device 44 separately from the symbols in the variable display areas 131 to 133.

  In the distribution process, it is determined in step S1209 whether the distribution closing period is in progress. The distribution closing period is a period from the end of the first opening of the distribution inlet 61 to the start of the second opening of the distribution inlet 61 in the second distribution execution mode. If it is not during the distribution closing period (step S1209: NO), the distribution release period set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (first distribution release period, second distribution release period, and third distribution release period) It is determined whether any of the above has elapsed (step S1213). If the distribution release period has elapsed, the distribution closing setting process is executed (step S1214). In the closing setting process, the register corresponding to the distribution entrance driving unit 63 in the main MPU 92 is cleared to “0”. Thereby, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the distribution inlet drive unit 63 is stopped to switch the distribution inlet 61 to the closed state. . Thereafter, the value of the open / close count counter SOC of the main RAM 94 is decremented by 1 (step S1215), and the value of the open / close count counter SOC after the 1 subtraction is “1” (step S1216: YES). The distribution closing period (specifically, 6 sec) is set in the timer counter of the side RAM 94 (step S1217). Thereby, measurement of the distribution closed period is started.

  When the distribution closing period is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S1209. If the distribution closing period has elapsed (step S1210: YES), the third distribution release period (specifically, 15 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1211). Then, an opening setting process for distribution is executed (step S1212). In the opening setting process, “1” is set in the register corresponding to the distribution entrance driving unit 63 in the main MPU 92. Thereby, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the distribution inlet drive unit 63 is started to switch the distribution inlet 61 to the open state. . In this case, the distribution inlet 61 is opened in the distribution-side middle period mode.

  If the value of the open / close count counter SOC becomes “0” as a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the open / close count counter SOC of the main RAM 94 in step S1215 (step S1216: NO), the distribution end processing in step S1222 is performed. Execute. If it is determined in step S1213 that the allocation release period has not elapsed, it is determined that one of the count detection sensor 68 and the V prize detection sensor 69 of the allocation prize winning device 36 has detected a game ball. As a condition (step S1218: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the winning counter PC in the main RAM 94 (step S1219), and the condition is that the value of the winning counter PC is “0” (step S1220: YES). Similar to S1214, the closing setting process for distribution is executed (step S1221). Thereafter, a distribution end process is executed in step S1222.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the distribution end process in step S1222. If “1” is not set in the V winning flag of the main RAM 94 (step S1301: NO), a stop result setting process when no V winning is generated is executed (step S1302). In the stop result setting process, information on the stop state of the pattern on the distribution display unit 42c corresponding to the fact that no game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 is read out. Thereby, the variation display of the pattern is stopped in a state where the pattern corresponding to the fact that the V winning is not generated in the current distribution execution mode is displayed on the distribution display unit 42c. Regardless of whether or not the game pattern is stopped and displayed in the distribution display unit 42c in the game time execution period and the opening / closing execution mode, the next display of the variation display of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c is started. Maintained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the distribution execution mode that is not accompanied by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is completed, or when the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the display so far on the distribution display unit 42c is displayed. It may be configured to be erased. In this case, the distribution display unit 42c may be configured such that nothing is displayed, or may be configured to continue the display indicating that it is not changing.

  Thereafter, a game state transition process is executed (step S1303). In the game state transition process, if the winning result that triggered the current distribution execution mode is a low probability winning result, the winning lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. To do. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times). On the other hand, if the winning result that triggered the current distribution execution mode is a highly likely winning result, the winning lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are continued until the result of the success / failure determination process becomes a winning result, and shifts to the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 by that.

  Thereafter, a flag clear process is executed (step S1304). In the flag clear process, “0” is cleared for the various flags used in the game times that triggered the execution of the current distribution execution mode and the various flags used in the current distribution execution mode. Further, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0” (step S1305). As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

  On the other hand, when “1” is set in the V winning flag of the main RAM 94 (step S1301: YES), a stop result setting process when a V winning is generated is executed (step S1306). In the stop result setting process, information on the stop state of the picture on the distribution display unit 42c corresponding to the game ball detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 is read. The information on the stop mode of the pattern is information on the stop mode that is not selected in the stop result setting process when no V prize is generated in step S1302. Thereby, the variation display of the pattern is stopped in a state in which the pattern corresponding to the occurrence of the V winning in the distribution execution mode is displayed on the distribution display unit 42c. In step S1306, different stop mode information is read depending on whether the current distribution execution mode is the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode. That is, when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the first distribution execution mode and when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the second distribution execution mode, The stop mode of the pattern when the variable display of the pattern in the minute display part 42c is completed is different. As a result, it is possible to grasp from the display mode of the distribution display unit 42c which opening / closing execution mode that occurs thereafter is triggered by the occurrence of the V winning in which distribution execution mode. . Further, as already described, the pattern mode stopped and displayed in the distribution display unit 42c is maintained until the next display of the variation of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c is started. Will continue to be displayed. Thus, by confirming the distribution display unit 42c at any timing during the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to determine in which distribution execution mode the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the occurrence of the V prize. It becomes possible to confirm.

  Thereafter, information on the opening period for special electricity (for example, 3 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1307). Thereby, measurement of the opening period for special electricity is started. In step S1308, by determining whether or not “1” is set in the first distribution execution flag of the main RAM 94, the current distribution execution mode is the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution. It is determined which of the execution modes. If it is in the first distribution execution mode (step S1308: YES), a first opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S1309). If it is the second distribution execution mode (step S1308: NO), the second opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S1310).

  When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the first opening command from the main side MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S622 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and displays the control table corresponding to the first opening command. Data is read from the ROM 104 to the sound light side RAM 105 (step S623). In the control table, light emission control data of the display light emitting unit 73 and sound output control data of the speaker unit 74 in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode are set. By referring to the control table, the display light emitting unit 73 executes a light emission effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode, and the speaker unit 74 sets the first distribution execution mode. A sound output effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode triggered is executed. Further, the first opening command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S624). When the display side MPU 113 receives the first opening command from the sound light side MPU 103, the display effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18). The display pattern table for executing is read. Thereby, the display effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode is executed in the symbol display device 44. The content of the display effect is different from the content of the display effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode.

  When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the second opening command from the main side MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S625 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and displays the control table corresponding to the second opening command. Data is read from the ROM 104 to the sound light side RAM 105 (step S626). In the control table, the light emission control data of the display light emitting unit 73 and the sound output control data of the speaker unit 74 in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode are set. By referring to the control table, the display light emitting unit 73 executes a light emission effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode, and the speaker unit 74 sets the second distribution execution mode. A sound output effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode triggered is executed. Further, the second opening command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S627). When the display side MPU 113 receives the second opening command from the sound light side MPU 103, the display effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18). The display pattern table for executing is read. Thereby, the display effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is executed in the symbol display device 44. The content of the display effect is different from the content of the display effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode.

  When the process of step S1309 or step S1310 is executed, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1 (step S1311). Since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the distribution process is executed is “5”, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “6” corresponding to the special electricity start process (step S311) by adding one. It becomes.

<Special electricity start processing>
Next, the special electricity start process executed in step S311 of the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special electricity start process, when the special electricity opening period has elapsed (step S1401: YES), the round counter RC provided in the main RAM 94 is set to “15” (step S1402), and the main RAM 94 wins a prize. “10” is set in the counter PC. The round counter RC is a counter for the main MPU 92 to specify the number of remaining round games in the opening / closing execution mode. In the opening / closing execution mode, the winning counter PC is a counter for the main MPU 92 to specify the remaining number of the upper limit number that can be won in the special electric prize winning device 37 in each round.

  Thereafter, the special game release period of the round game (specifically 29 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1404). Then, an opening setting process for special electricity is executed (step S1405). In the opening setting process, “1” is set in the register corresponding to the special electric drive unit 37 c in the main MPU 92. Thereby, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 37c is started to switch the special winning opening 37a to the open state.

  Thereafter, the release command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S1406). When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the release command from the main side MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 103 transmits the release command to the display side MPU 113 in the other processing of step S628 in the table setting processing (FIG. 17). When the display side MPU 113 receives the release command from the sound light side MPU 103, in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), the display side MPU 113 executes a display effect corresponding to the fact that the special winning opening 37a is being opened. Read the display pattern table. Thereby, a display effect corresponding to the fact that the special winning opening 37a is being opened in the symbol display device 44 is executed.

  Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S1407). When the special electricity start process is executed, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “6”, and by adding 1 the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “7” corresponding to the special electricity release process (step S312). It becomes.

<Processing during opening of special electricity>
Next, the special electric power release opening process executed in step S312 of the special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the special electricity release period has not elapsed (step S1501: NO), the value of the prize counter PC is decremented by 1 (step S1502: YES) on condition that the special electricity prize winning device 37 has been won (step S1502: YES) (step S1501: NO). S1503). If the value of the winning counter PC after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S1504: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter RC (step S1505). Also, when the special electricity release period has elapsed (step S1501: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter RC (step S1505).

  Thereafter, by determining whether or not “1” is set in the first distribution execution flag of the main RAM 94, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the first distribution execution mode. (Step S1506). When “1” is set in the first distribution execution flag (step S1506: YES), the first special electricity closing period is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1507), and the first distribution execution flag is set. If “1” is not set (step S1506: NO), the second special electricity closing period is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1508).

  The second special electricity closing period is set to a time longer than the first special electricity closing period, as described above, and further set to a time longer than the special electricity opening period. Specifically, the first special electricity closing period is set to 2 seconds, while the second special electricity closing period is set to 60 seconds, which is twice or more the special electricity opening period. The setting of the second special electricity closing period is always performed between round games in the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, when the V winning detection sensor 69 detects that a game ball has been detected in the second allocation execution mode and the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the V winning detection sensor 69 is switched to the first allocation execution mode. Compared to the case where the game ball is detected and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the minimum time required for the completion is longer.

  When the process of step S1507 or step S1508 is executed, a special electricity closing setting process is executed (step S1509). In the closing setting process, the register corresponding to the special electric drive unit 37c in the main MPU 92 is cleared to “0”. As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 37c is stopped to switch the special winning opening 37a to the closed state.

  Thereafter, a close command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S1510). When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the close command from the main side MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 103 transmits the close command to the display side MPU 113 in the other process of step S 628 in the table setting process (FIG. 17). When the display-side MPU 113 receives a close command from the sound light-side MPU 103, in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), the display-side MPU 113 executes a display effect corresponding to the fact that the special winning opening 37a is closed. Read the display pattern table. Thereby, a display effect corresponding to the fact that the special winning opening 37a is closed in the symbol display device 44 is executed.

  Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S1511). Since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special electric release opening process is executed is "7", the value of the special figure special electric counter is "8" corresponding to the special electric charge closing process (step S313) by adding 1. It becomes.

<Treatment during special electricity closure>
Next, the special electric power closing process executed in step S313 of the special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the value of the round counter RC is not “0” (step S1601: NO), it is confirmed whether or not the timer counter value of the main RAM 94 is “0”, thereby closing the special electric power closing period (first special electric power closing). It is determined whether the period or the second special electricity closing period has elapsed (step S1602). When the special electricity closing period has elapsed (step S1602: YES), “10” is set to the winning counter PC of the main RAM 94 (step S1603), and the special electricity release period (specifically 29 sec) of the round game is set. The timer counter of the main side RAM 94 is set (step S1604). Thereafter, a special electricity release setting process is executed in the same manner as in step S1405 in the special electricity start process (FIG. 25) (step S1605), and an open command is issued in the same manner as in step S1406 in the special electricity start process (FIG. 25). (Step S1606). Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S1607). Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the special electric power closing process is executed is “8”, the value of the special figure special electric power counter is reduced to “7” corresponding to the special electric charge opening process (step S312) by 1 subtraction. "

  On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is “0” (step S1601: YES), an ending command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S1608). When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the ending command from the main side MPU 92, the sound table side MPU 103 transmits the control table corresponding to the ending command from the sound light side ROM 104 to the sound light in the other processing of step S 628 in the table setting process (FIG. 17). Read to the side RAM 105. In the control table, the light emission control data of the display light emitting unit 73 and the sound output control data of the speaker unit 74 in the ending period are set. By referring to the control table, the display light emitting unit 73 executes a light emission effect corresponding to the ending period, and the speaker unit 74 executes a sound output effect corresponding to the ending period. The sound light side MPU 103 transmits an ending command to the display side MPU 113. When receiving the ending command from the sound light side MPU 103, the display side MPU 113 reads a display pattern table for executing a display effect corresponding to the ending period in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18). Thereby, the display effect corresponding to the ending period is executed in the symbol display device 44.

  Thereafter, information on the ending period (for example, 5 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1609). Thereby, measurement of an ending period is started. Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S1610). Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the special electric power closing process is executed is “8”, the value of the special figure special electric power counter is “9” corresponding to the special electric power end process (step S314) by adding 1. It becomes.

<Special electricity termination processing>
Next, the special power end process executed in step S314 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special electricity ending process, when the ending period has elapsed (step S1701: YES), a game state transition process is executed (step S1702). In the game state transition process, if the winning result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is a low-probability result, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode. . However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times). On the other hand, if the winning result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is a highly accurate winning result, the winning lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are continued until the result of the success / failure determination process becomes a winning result, and shifts to the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 by that.

  Thereafter, a flag clear process is executed (step S1703). In the flag clear process, the various flags used in the game times that triggered the execution of the current distribution execution mode, the various flags used in the current distribution execution mode, and the various flags used in the current opening / closing execution mode Clear the flag to “0”. Also, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0” (step S1704). As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

<Game progressing>
Next, how the game progresses in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 29 (a) shows an execution period of the game times, FIG. 29 (b) shows a timing when winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs, and FIG. 29 (c) shows an execution period of the distribution execution mode. FIG. 29D shows the timing at which the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36, FIG. 29E shows the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode, and FIG. f) shows a period during which the variation display of the pattern is executed in the special figure display unit 42a, FIG. 29 (g) shows a period during which the variation display of the pattern is executed in the distribution display unit 42c, and FIG. h) is a period in which the effect for playing the game is being executed on the symbol display device 44 and the reach variation display is not being executed. FIG. 29 (i) is a diagram in which the reach variation display is executed on the symbol display device 44. 29 (a) and FIG. 29 ( ) Indicates a period in which a combination of three identical symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol display device 44.

  First, a case where a result of losing in the success / failure determination process is described.

  At the timing of t1, the game times are started as shown in FIG. 29 (a), and as shown in FIG. 29 (f), the variation display of the pattern is started on the special figure display unit 42a. As shown in FIG. 29 (h), the variable display of the symbols is started in the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, when the game display variation display period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 29 (f), the variation display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 42a is completed, and FIG. 29 (h) As shown in FIG. 29, the symbol variation display in the variation display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44 is terminated, and the current game round is terminated as shown in FIG. In this case, the special figure display unit 42a stops the display of the pattern corresponding to the result of losing / deciding result. In addition, in each of the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44, combinations of symbols different from the combinations of reach symbols and the same symbols are stopped and displayed.

  Next, a case will be described in which the success / failure determination process results in a winning result and the process shifts to the distribution execution mode but the shift to the opening / closing execution mode does not occur.

  At the timing of t3, the game times are started as shown in FIG. 29 (a), and as shown in FIG. 29 (f), the variation display of the pattern is started on the special figure display unit 42a. As shown in FIG. 29 (h), the variable display of the symbols is started in the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44. After that, at the timing of t4, when the game time variation display period elapses, the current game time ends as shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29 (f), the variation display of the picture in the special figure display section 42a is terminated. In this case, the special figure display unit 42a stops and displays the pattern corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process (the low or high probability result). Further, as shown in FIGS. 29 (h) and 29 (i), in the symbol display device 44, the first variation display area 131 is displayed from the situation where the variation display of the symbols is performed in each of the variation display areas 131 to 133. In addition, the combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed in the second variation display area 132, and the state is changed to a situation where reach variation display is performed in which the variation display of the symbols is continued in the third variation display area 133. By confirming that the reach variation display has been started, the player can clearly recognize that the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 has started.

  In addition, at the timing of t4, which is the timing when the game round is finished, as shown in FIG. 29 (g), the variation display of the pattern is started on the distribution display unit 42c. The manager of the game hall confirms whether or not the variation display of the symbol is being displayed on the distribution display unit 42c in the situation where the reach variation display is being performed on the symbol display device 44. It is possible to grasp whether or not the display is regular.

  Then, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 is generated, whereby the distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 29 (c). Even when the distribution execution mode is started, the pattern change display on the distribution display unit 42c is continued as shown in FIG. 29 (g), and as shown in FIG. 29 (i). The reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is continued.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (d), the distribution execution mode is set as shown in FIG. 29 (c) at the timing of t6 without detecting the game ball in the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36. finish. In this case, as shown in FIG. 29 (g), the pattern change display on the distribution display unit 42c is terminated at the timing of t6. When the variable display is ended, the pattern corresponding to the stop result when the V prize is not generated is stopped and displayed on the distribution display unit 42c. At the timing t6, the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is terminated as shown in FIG. 29 (i). When the variation display is terminated, a symbol different from the symbols constituting the reach symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the third variation display area 133 of the symbol display device 44. This notifies the player that the opening / closing execution mode does not occur after the distribution execution mode.

  Next, a case will be described in which the winning / failing determination process results in a winning result, the process shifts to the distribution execution mode, and the process shifts to the opening / closing execution mode after the distribution execution mode ends.

  At the timing of t7, the game times are started as shown in FIG. 29 (a), whereby the variation display of the pattern is started on the special figure display unit 42a as shown in FIG. 29 (f). As shown in FIG. 29 (h), the variable display of the symbols is started in the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44. Thereafter, at the timing of t8, when the game time variation display period elapses, the current game time ends as shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29 (f), the variation display of the picture in the special figure display section 42a is terminated. In this case, the special figure display unit 42a stops and displays the pattern corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process (the low or high probability result). Further, as shown in FIGS. 29 (h) and 29 (i), in the symbol display device 44, the first variation display area 131 is displayed from the situation where the variation display of the symbols is performed in each of the variation display areas 131 to 133. In addition, the combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed in the second variation display area 132, and the state is changed to a situation where reach variation display is performed in which the variation display of the symbols is continued in the third variation display area 133. By confirming that the reach variation display has been started, the player can clearly recognize that the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 has started.

  In addition, at the timing of t8, which is the timing when the game round is finished, as shown in FIG. 29 (g), the variation display of the pattern is started on the distribution display unit 42c. The manager of the game hall confirms whether or not the variation display of the symbol is being displayed on the distribution display unit 42c in the situation where the reach variation display is being performed on the symbol display device 44. It is possible to grasp whether or not the display is regular.

  Then, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 is generated, whereby the distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 29 (c). Even when the distribution execution mode is started, the pattern change display on the distribution display unit 42c is continued as shown in FIG. 29 (g), and as shown in FIG. 29 (i). The reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is continued.

  Thereafter, the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 as shown in FIG. In this case, at the timing of the time t10, as shown in FIGS. 29 (i) and 29 (j), in the third variable display area 133 of the symbol display device 44, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach symbol combination. Is stopped. Thereby, in the symbol display device 44, the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed in each of the variable display areas 131 to 133. Even if the V prize is generated, the distribution execution mode is continued as shown in FIG. 29C, and the variation display of the pattern on the distribution display unit 42c is continued as shown in FIG. 29G. The

  Thereafter, the distribution execution mode ends at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 29 (g), the variation display of the pattern on the distribution display unit 42c is terminated at the timing of t11. When the variable display is ended, the pattern corresponding to the stop result when the V winning is generated is stopped and displayed on the distribution display unit 42c. Then, at the timing of t11, the opening / closing execution mode is started as shown in FIG.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the distribution execution mode, even if a game ball enters the distribution winning device 36, the transition to the opening / closing execution mode does not occur unless the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69. As a result, in the distribution execution mode, the player not only enters the game ball into the distribution winning device 36 but also detects the game ball that has entered the distribution winning device 36 by the V winning detection sensor 69. I expect that. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation becomes stepwise, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode are set as the distribution execution mode. Basically, in the first distribution execution mode, the V winning detection sensor 69 detects the game ball. On the other hand, in the second allocation execution mode, detection of a game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69 does not occur. As a result, the player expects the first distribution execution mode to be executed. Therefore, the number of objects that the player expects can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, even if the first distribution execution mode is not selected in the distribution determination process, the second distribution execution mode is executed. As a result, when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs and the distribution determination process is executed, the distribution execution mode is executed regardless of the result of the distribution determination process. The Rukoto. Therefore, it is possible to give many opportunities to execute the distribution execution mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  When a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the distribution execution mode, an opening / closing execution mode in which the special electricity winning device 37 is opened / closed occurs. As a result, when the game winning ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, from the situation where the game winning ball is made to enter the opened winning winning device 36, the special prize winning in the open state is made. A transition is made to the situation where a game ball is entered into the device 37, and the situation where a game ball is entered into the opened device is extended. Therefore, it is possible to ensure a long game execution period in which a game ball is inserted into an open device.

  In the distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 36 is in the open state, and in the opening / closing execution mode, the special prize winning device 37 is in the open state, so that the target for the occurrence of the ball changes according to each mode. Therefore, in a configuration in which a game is performed in which a game ball is inserted into a device that is in an open state in either the distribution execution mode or the opening / closing execution mode, the difference between the modes may be clarified. It becomes possible.

  In any of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode, when a game ball enters the distribution winning device 36, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Thereby, even when the second distribution execution mode occurs, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game from being extremely reduced.

  In any of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode, the total period during which the distribution winning device 36 is in the open state is allocated to the distribution winning device 36 in relation to the game ball firing cycle. It is set to a period during which the upper limit number of game balls can be entered. Thereby, it becomes possible to reduce a player's feeling of disadvantage for the occurrence of the second distribution execution mode.

  Even if the V winning detection sensor 69 detects a game ball in a situation that is not in the distribution execution mode, the opening / closing execution mode does not occur. If the V winning detection sensor 69 detects a game ball in a situation that is not in the distribution execution mode, there is a high possibility that it is caused by fraud. In this case, by preventing the opening / closing execution mode from occurring. , It is possible to prevent profits from being granted for such misconduct.

  A distribution execution mode is generated by causing a game ball to enter the distribution through winning portion 35. In other words, in order to generate the opening / closing execution mode, first, a game ball is inserted into the distribution through winning portion 35 to start the distribution execution mode, and in the distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 36 is instructed. It is necessary to enter a game ball and generate a V prize. As a result, the target for entering the game ball changes in stages, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, when a game ball enters the distribution through winning section 35 during the winning effective period of the distribution through winning section 35, the shift to the distribution execution mode occurs, and the winning effective period Even if a game ball enters the distribution through winning portion 35 during a period different from the above, the transition to the distribution execution mode does not occur. Thereby, it is possible to limit the situation in which the distribution execution mode is executed based on the game balls entering the distribution through winning portion 35.

  Different notifications are executed on the symbol display device 44 depending on whether a V prize is generated in the first distribution execution mode or a V prize is generated in the second distribution execution mode. Similarly, different notifications are executed in the distribution display unit 42c when a V prize is generated in the first distribution execution mode and when a V prize is generated in the second distribution execution mode. This makes it possible to clearly grasp in which distribution execution mode the V winning has occurred.

  When the winning / no-go determining process is executed, the symbol variation display is started in each variation display area 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44, and the first payout valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs. Reach variation display is performed in the third variation display region 133 in a state where the combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed in the variation display region 131 and the second variation display region 132, and the reach variation display is performed on the distribution through winning portion 35. This is also continued in the winning period and the allocation execution mode. When the V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode, the reach variation display in the third variation display area 133 is stopped in a state where the same symbols as the symbols forming the combination of the reach symbols are stopped and displayed. When the allocation execution mode ends without generating a V prize, the reach variation display in the third variation display area 133 is stopped so that the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed. As a result, not only the fact that the game times are being executed and the result of the success / failure determination process are notified using the symbol variation display in each of the variation display areas 131 to 133, but also the winning of the distribution through winning portion 35 is awarded. The validity period, the distribution execution mode, and the presence / absence of occurrence of a V prize in the distribution execution mode are notified. Therefore, various types of information can be notified using the symbol variation display in each variation display region 131-133.

  While the game times are being executed, the special figure display unit 42a displays the variation of the pattern, and when the variation display of the pattern ends, the pattern corresponding to the result of the determination process is stopped and displayed. Further, in the winning validity period and the distribution execution mode of the distribution through winning section 35, the pattern display is performed in the distribution display section 42c, and when the display of the variation of the pattern ends, the distribution execution mode The pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of occurrence of the V prize is stopped and displayed. Thus, in the configuration in which a series of effects are executed in the game times, the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 and the distribution execution mode in each of the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44, the special display is performed. By checking the unit 42a and the distribution display unit 42c, it becomes possible to monitor each period individually.

  When the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 is started, the change display of the pattern on the distribution display portion 42c is started. Thereby, the manager of the game hall confirms whether or not the variation display of the pattern has been started in the distribution display unit 42c, thereby determining whether or not the winning valid period of the distribution through winning unit 35 has been started. It becomes possible to grasp clearly.

  The change display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 42a is ended before the winning validity period of the distribution through winning unit 35 is started. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether or not the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 to be generated is regular by checking the special figure display portion 42a. It becomes.

  Both the special figure display unit 42 a and the distribution display unit 42 c are directly controlled by the main MPU 92. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve the reliability of the content displayed on the special figure display part 42a and the distribution display part 42c.

  In the opening / closing execution mode generated with the second distribution execution mode as an opportunity, the special electricity closing period between rounds is longer than the opening / closing execution mode generated with the first distribution execution mode as an opportunity. In the opening / closing execution mode that is triggered by the second distribution execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 itself, that is, the symbol display device 44, the display light emitting unit 73, and the speaker unit 74 notifies that fact. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the fact during the opening / closing execution mode and to give the manager sufficient time to deal with the fact. Furthermore, when the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the second distribution execution mode due to fraud, it is possible to reduce the digestibility of the opening / closing execution mode, and the unit time for the fraud It is possible to reduce the amount of profits obtained per hit.

  In addition, the period during which the special prize winning device 37 is closed in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is longer than that of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode. Since the closed period is constant without depending on the situation where game balls are being fired, etc., opening and closing triggered by the second sort execution mode by lengthening such closed period It becomes possible to make the execution mode longer.

  Also, not only the ending period is lengthened and the opening / closing execution mode is lengthened, but the special electricity closing period before the last round game is lengthened and the opening / closing execution mode is lengthened. Is planned. As a result, when the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is caused by an illegal act, the illegal act is dealt with at a stage before the game ball payout in the opening / closing execution mode is completed. It becomes possible to do.

  Further, the upper limit number and the special electricity release period of each round game are the same in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode and the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode occurs as a result of a regular game played instead of an illegal act, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode It is possible to pay out game balls equivalent to.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process is a hit result, the distribution execution mode of the type corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process or the type determination process is not executed, but the distribution is executed after the game round is completed. The sort execution mode corresponding to the result of the assignment determination process executed when a game ball has entered the distribution through winning part 35 during the winning validity period of the through through winning part 35 is executed. The Accordingly, the player performs a launch operation while expecting that the type of the distribution execution mode will be an advantageous type for the player during the winning validity period in which it is determined that the distribution execution mode will occur. Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Since the distribution determination process is executed based on the game ball entering the distribution through winning portion 35, it is possible to clarify the execution trigger of the distribution determination process. Further, when a game ball enters the distribution through winning portion 35 during the winning validity period, not only the distribution determination process but also the distribution execution mode is started. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the understanding of the game content as compared to a configuration in which each opportunity is different.

  It is possible to grasp whether or not the distribution execution mode is being executed by checking the distribution display unit 42c by displaying the variation of the pattern on the distribution display unit 42c in the distribution execution mode. It becomes. Further, in the configuration in which the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs and the transition to the opening / closing execution mode does not occur depending on whether or not the V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode, The stop result of the distribution display part 42c changes depending on whether or not a V prize has occurred. Thus, not only as a display unit for notifying that the distribution execution mode is being executed, the distribution display unit 42c is a display for notifying whether or not a V winning has occurred in the distribution execution mode. It becomes possible to function as a part.

  The content of the stop result when the display of the variation of the pattern on the distribution display unit 42c ends corresponds to the presence or absence of the V prize in the distribution execution mode. Accordingly, it is possible to grasp whether or not a V winning has occurred in the distribution execution mode by confirming the stop result when the display of the variation of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the confirmation timing easy to understand when confirming whether or not a V winning has occurred based on the contents of the distribution display unit 42c.

<Second Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the execution mode of the distribution execution mode is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 30 is a time chart showing an operation mode of the distribution winning device 36 in each of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. 30 (a1) and FIG. 30 (a2) show the execution period of the distribution execution mode, FIG. 30 (b1) and FIG. 30 (b2) show the distribution release period of the distribution winning device 36, and FIG. c1) and FIG. 30 (c2) show a period during which the switching piece 66 of the sorting and winning device 36 is arranged at the V guide position.

  First, the first distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. At the timing t1, the first distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 30 (a1), and the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started as shown in FIG. 30 (b1). In this case, the distribution side long-term release is performed.

  Thereafter, at a timing t2, when the predetermined period (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed since the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is first started, the switching piece 66 is guided to the V position from the retracted position as shown in FIG. Switch to position. Thereafter, when the V induction continuation period (for example, 3 sec) elapses from the timing t2, at the timing t3, the switching piece 66 is switched from the V induction position to the retracted position as shown in FIG.

  In this case, in the first distribution execution mode, the distribution inlet 61 is first opened in the distribution-side long-term mode, and the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guide position in relation to the game ball firing cycle. As for the timing, even if the launch operation is continued aiming at winning the distribution winning device 36 before the start of the first distribution execution mode, the number of winning prizes to the distributing winning device 36 is sure to be the upper limit number on the distribution side. It is the timing that does not reach. Therefore, if the launch operation is continued aiming at winning the distribution winning device 36 in the first distribution execution mode, any of the game balls winning the distribution entrance 61 will receive the V winning of the distribution winning device 36. The game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 after being reliably guided to the passage area 65c. When the V winning detection sensor 69 detects the game ball, the opening / closing execution mode is started after the end of the first distribution execution mode.

  Thereafter, when the distribution opening period corresponding to the distribution-side long-term mode elapses at the timing of t4, the distribution inlet 61 is closed as shown in FIG. 30 (b1). Then, at the timing t5 thereafter, the distribution inlet 61 is opened again as shown in FIG. 30 (b1). In this case, the distribution side short period mode is opened.

  Thereafter, when the distribution opening period corresponding to the distribution-side short period mode elapses at the timing of t6, the distribution inlet 61 is closed as illustrated in FIG. 30 (b1), and as illustrated in FIG. 30 (a1). The first distribution execution mode ends at the same time. In addition, when the number of winnings to the sorting winning device 36 reaches the sorting-side upper limit number before the allocation opening period elapses, the sorting inlet 61 is closed at a timing earlier than the timing of t6, and the first. The distribution execution mode ends. For example, if the number of winnings to the allocation winning device 36 reaches the allocation upper limit at a timing earlier than the timing of t4, the first allocation execution mode ends at that point, and the allocation-side short-term mode The re-opening of the distribution inlet 61 due to the above does not occur. However, even in this case, as described above, the first distribution execution mode is ended after an opportunity for the game ball to be guided to the V winning path area 65c occurs.

  Next, the second distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. At the timing of t11, the second distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 30 (a2), and the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started as shown in FIG. 30 (b2). In this case, in the second distribution execution mode, the opening of the distribution inlet 61 corresponds to the distribution-side short period mode. The distribution opening period according to the distribution side short period mode is shorter than the period required from when the distribution inlet 61 is first opened until the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guide position. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 30 (b2) and 30 (c2), the distribution inlet 61 is at the timing t12, which is the timing before the timing t13, which is the timing at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guide position. Closed. However, even if the distribution inlet 61 is closed, the second distribution execution mode is not ended and is continued.

  After that, at the timing of t13 when the second distribution execution mode is continued and the distribution inlet 61 is continuously closed, the predetermined distribution after the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is first started. When the time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the switching piece 66 is switched from the retracted position to the V guide position as shown in FIG. 30 (c2). After that, at the timing t14 when the second distribution execution mode is continued and the distribution inlet 61 is continuously closed, the V induction continuation period (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed from the timing t13. As a result, the switching piece 66 is switched from the V guide position to the retracted position as shown in FIG.

  In this case, since the opening mode of the distribution entrance 61 is the distribution side short period mode in the first opening time in the second distribution execution mode, no winning in the distribution winning device 36 occurs in the first opening time. Probability is high. Further, even if a prize is awarded to the allocation prize winning device 36, the game ball that wins the distribution prize winning device 36 and normally flows down at the timing when the first opening round ends is branched in the allocation prize winning device 36. The longest period required to reach the downstream side of the branch position to the V winning path area 65c in the path 65 is the period from the end of the first opening to the timing when the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guide position. Shorter than (timing from t12 to timing from t13). Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36 even if the launch operation is continued aiming at winning the distribution winning device 36 in the second distribution execution mode. Is low. Then, since the V winning detection sensor 69 does not detect the game ball, the opening / closing execution mode is not started after the end of the second distribution execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (b2), the distribution inlet 61 is opened again at the timing t15, which is later than the timing t14, which is the timing when the switching piece 66 is switched from the V guide position to the retracted position. . The opening times of the distribution inlet 61 also correspond to the distribution side short-term mode. Thereafter, the distribution opening period corresponding to the distribution-side short period mode elapses at the timing of t16, whereby the distribution inlet 61 is closed as illustrated in FIG. 30 (b2), and illustrated in FIG. 30 (a2). Thus, the second distribution execution mode ends.

  As described above, in the first distribution execution mode, if the game ball aiming at winning the distribution winning device 36 is normally fired, the V winning detection sensor 69 detects the game ball, and the first The opening / closing execution mode occurs after the end of the one distribution execution mode. On the other hand, in the second allocation execution mode, even if the game ball aiming for winning in the allocation prize winning device 36 is normally fired, the detection of the game ball in the V winning detection sensor 69 basically occurs. No, the opening / closing execution mode does not occur after the end of the second distribution execution mode. As a result, the player expects the first distribution execution mode to occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the first distribution execution mode, more than the upper limit number of game balls can be awarded to the distribution winning device 36, whereas in the second distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 36 is reached. It is not possible to expect a prize for more than the maximum number of game balls allocated to the game. Furthermore, in the second allocation execution mode, there is a high possibility that no winning for the allocation winning device 36 will occur. Thereby, it is possible to increase the advantage of the first distribution execution mode with respect to the second distribution execution mode.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the sorting standby process executed by the main MPU 92 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the distribution waiting process, when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 has occurred (step S1801: YES), the value of the distribution counter C3 is stored in the distribution execution area 125 (step S1801). S1802). Then, the distribution determination process is executed using the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 (step S1803). In the distribution determination process, the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 and the numerical information set as the first distribution execution mode in the distribution table. It is determined whether it matches any of the above.

  Thereafter, the display table for the distribution display unit 42c is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S1804). In the display table for the distribution display unit 42c, data for specifying the display content of the distribution display unit 42c corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set. That is, the display table includes data for specifying the display contents of the distribution display unit 42c corresponding to the first distribution execution mode and the display contents of the distribution display unit 42c corresponding to the second distribution execution mode. And data for specifying the are set. For example, when the distribution display unit 42c is a so-called 7-segment display, data for displaying “1” on the distribution display unit 42c as the display content of the distribution display unit 42c corresponding to the first distribution execution mode. Is set, and data for displaying “2” on the distribution display unit 42c is set as the display content of the distribution display unit 42c corresponding to the second distribution execution mode.

  Thereafter, data corresponding to the result of the current distribution determination process is specified from the display table for the distribution display unit 42c, and the specified data is set as display control data for the distribution display unit 42c (step S1805). ). As a result, the result of the sorting determination process is displayed on the sorting display unit 42c. That is, in the present embodiment, when the distribution determination process is executed, a display corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is performed on the distribution display unit 42c, and the distribution display unit 42c changes the pattern. The display is not executed. As described above, when the distribution execution mode is started by displaying the result of the distribution determination process on the distribution display unit 42c, the distribution execution mode is changed to the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. Which of the minute execution modes is supported can be notified by the distribution display unit 42c.

  In addition, when the distribution execution mode is started, the display corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process displayed on the distribution display unit 42c is when the distribution execution mode is not accompanied by the shift to the opening / closing execution mode. Is terminated when the distribution execution mode ends, and when the opening / closing execution mode occurs, it ends when the opening / closing execution mode ends. Thus, by confirming the distribution display unit 42c at an arbitrary timing in the situation where the distribution execution mode is being executed, the distribution execution mode is changed to either the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode. It is possible to grasp whether the opening / closing execution mode is compatible, and by checking the distribution display unit 42c at an arbitrary timing in a situation where the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the opening / closing execution mode is changed to the first distribution execution mode and the first distribution execution mode. It is possible to grasp which of the two distribution execution modes is triggered.

  Instead of the configuration in which the display on the distribution display unit 42c is erased at the end of the sorting execution mode without the transition to the opening / closing execution mode or at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs. Regardless of whether or not the distribution execution mode is ended, it may be deleted, or may be deleted when a new game round is started. Further, the distribution display unit 42c continues to display the pattern corresponding to the result of the previous distribution determination process, and when the distribution determination process is executed, the display of the pattern corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is performed. The content may be changed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process in step S1803 (step S1806). When the first distribution execution mode is selected (step S1806: YES), “1” is set to the first distribution execution flag provided in the main RAM 94 (step S1807). The first distribution execution flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 92 which one of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode should be executed as the distribution execution mode. When the value of the first distribution execution flag is “1”, it is specified that the first distribution execution mode should be executed. When the value of the first distribution execution flag is “0” Specifies that the second distribution execution mode should be executed. Thereafter, the first distribution command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S1808). The processing contents of the sound light side MPU 103 and the display side MPU 113 when the first distribution command is transmitted from the main side MPU 92 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, when the second distribution execution mode is selected (step S1806: NO), the second distribution command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S1809). The processing contents of the sound light side MPU 103 and the display side MPU 113 when the second distribution command is transmitted from the main side MPU 92 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  When the process of step S1808 or step S1809 is executed, information on the distribution opening period (for example, 3 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1810). Thereby, measurement of the opening period for distribution is started. Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S1811). Since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the distribution standby process is executed is “3”, the value of the special figure special electricity counter corresponds to the distribution start process (step S309) by adding 1. “4”.

  In the present embodiment, the process for updating the display content in the distribution display unit 42c is not executed in the distribution start process (FIG. 22) and the distribution process (FIG. 23).

  As described above, when the distribution determination process is executed, a display corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is performed on the distribution display unit 42c. As described above, when the distribution execution mode is started by displaying the result of the distribution determination process on the distribution display unit 42c, the distribution execution mode is changed to the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. Which of the minute execution modes is supported can be notified by the distribution display unit 42c.

  When the distribution execution mode is started, the display corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process displayed in the distribution display unit 42c is the distribution execution mode that does not involve the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. When the distribution execution mode ends, the process is terminated. When the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the process ends. Thus, by confirming the distribution display unit 42c at an arbitrary timing in the situation where the distribution execution mode is being executed, the distribution execution mode is changed to either the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode. It is possible to grasp whether the opening / closing execution mode is compatible, and by checking the distribution display unit 42c at an arbitrary timing in a situation where the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the opening / closing execution mode is changed to the first distribution execution mode and the first distribution execution mode. It is possible to grasp which of the two distribution execution modes is triggered.

  The distribution display unit 42c is directly controlled by the main MPU 92. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve the reliability of the information displayed on the distribution display part 42c.

  A special figure display part 42a is provided separately from the distribution display part 42c, and the change display of the pattern during the game is performed by the special figure display part 42a. Thereby, the display unit for notifying that the game times are being executed and the result of the success / failure determination process, and the display unit for notifying the result of the allocation determination process include the special figure display unit 42a and the allocation. The display unit 42c is provided separately. Therefore, it is possible to monitor each content individually by checking the special figure display unit 42a and the distribution display unit 42c.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning validity period for the distribution through winning portion 35 is started, the display of the variation of the pattern is started in the distribution display portion 42c, and the winning through the distributing through winning portion 35 is received. When the distribution determination process occurs and the distribution determination process is executed, the variation display of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c may be terminated while the pattern corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is stopped. In this case, it is possible to grasp whether or not it is the winning validity period for the distribution through winning portion 35 by checking whether or not the display of the variation of the pattern is executed in the distribution display portion 42c. It becomes.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a display unit that is directly controlled by the main MPU 92 is provided separately from the special figure display unit 42a and the distribution display unit 42c. It is good also as composition which performs. In this case, in the display unit, similar to the distribution display unit 42c in the first embodiment, when the variable display of the pattern is terminated depending on whether or not the V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode. It is good also as a structure which makes the kind of the pattern to stop differ.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In each of the embodiments described above, when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs during the winning validity period of the distributing through winning portion 35, the shift to the distribution execution mode is surely generated. In the present embodiment, even when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs during the winning validity period, it is possible that the transition to the distribution execution mode does not occur. In addition, the probability of winning the shift to the distribution execution mode when the winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs varies according to the gaming state. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  First, the types of hit results in this embodiment will be described. As in the first embodiment, the winning result is selected in the type determination process (step S405) in the main MPU 92 by being the winning result in the determination process (step S403) in the main MPU 92. Although there are a plurality of types of winning results that are common in that the winning through period winning portion 35 for allocation is a trigger for the start of the winning validity period, a combination of the winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process It is an opportunity to change the type to a different type. However, even if the type of winning result is selected in the type determination process, it corresponds to the selected winning result as long as there is no transition to the open / close execution mode triggered by the game time in which the type determination process is executed Each winning probability is not set.

  As data for selecting the type of winning result by lottery in the type determination process, a type table 93a is provided in the main ROM 93 as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. FIG. 32B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the type table 93a. In the type table 93a, as a distribution destination of the hit result for the type counter C2, the low hit result, the first high hit result, the second high hit result, the third high hit result, and the fourth high There is a hit result and a fifth high chance result. Specifically, in the type table 93a, among the type counters C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low probability result, and “10 to 13” corresponds to the first high probability result. “14-17” corresponds to the second high probability result, “18-21” corresponds to the third high probability result, and “22-25” corresponds to the fourth result. This corresponds to the high-accuracy result, and “26 to 29” corresponds to the fifth high-accuracy result.

  Corresponding to each of these hit results, as shown in FIG. 32A, the main ROM 93 has a low accuracy table group 93b, a first high accuracy table group 93c, a second high accuracy table group 93d, A third high accuracy table group 93e, a fourth high accuracy table group 93f, and a fifth high accuracy table group 93g are provided. If any winning result is selected in the type determination process in a predetermined game time, and the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs triggered by the predetermined game time, the type determination is performed when the opening / closing execution mode ends. A gaming state corresponding to the winning result selected in the processing is set. When game times are performed in the gaming state, the success / failure determination process is executed using the success / failure tables included in the table groups 93b to 93g corresponding to the gaming state, and the game times are changed following the game times. When the winning validity period of the through-thru winning portion 35 is generated, the allocation determination process is executed using the allocation tables included in the table groups 93b to 93g corresponding to the gaming state. In the success / failure table, the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1 which is a winning result in the success / failure determination process is set. In the distribution table, a numerical range of the distribution counter C3 that is a winning result in the distribution determination process is set, and the numerical range that is the winning result includes the execution winning of the first distribution execution mode. A numerical value range of the distribution counter C3 and a numerical value range of the distribution counter C3 to be selected for execution in the second distribution execution mode are set.

  FIG. 32C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the table groups 93b to 93g corresponding to each hit result. In the case of a low probability result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/40, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 1/5. In this case, the combined probability that becomes a winning result in the success / failure determination process and becomes a winning result in any of the distribution execution modes in the distribution determination process is 1/200. In the case of the first high-accuracy result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is ¼ higher than that of the low-accuracy result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is the case of the low-accuracy result. It becomes the same 1/5, and the synthesis probability is 1/20 higher than the case of the low probability result. In the case of the second high-accuracy result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/8 higher than that of the low-accuracy result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that of the low-accuracy result. 2/5 which is also high, and the synthesis probability is 1/20, which is the same as in the case of the first high-accuracy result. In the case of the third high-accuracy result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/10 higher than that of the low-accuracy result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that of the low-accuracy result. 2/5, which is higher than that of the first to second high-accuracy results, and 1/25 higher than that of the low-accuracy results. In the case of the fourth high-accuracy result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/20 higher than that of the low-accuracy result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that of the low-accuracy result. 4/5 which is also high, and the synthesis probability is 1/25, which is the same as in the case of the third high probability result. In the case of the fifth high-accuracy result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/40, which is the same as that of the low-accuracy result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that of the low-accuracy result. Becomes 1/1 (ie, 100%), and the synthesis probability is lower than that of the first to fourth high probability results and is higher than 1/40 that of the low probability results.

  As described above, when the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process are executed in a manner corresponding to any of the high-accuracy results, the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process are performed in an aspect corresponding to the low-accuracy result. The synthesis probability is higher than when executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of achieving any one of the high probability results.

  Depending on the type of the high-accuracy hit result, the combination type of the winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the setting modes of the winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process, and accordingly, it is possible to diversify the game.

  The synthesis probability is different depending on the type of the high-accuracy hit result. This makes it possible to produce advantages and disadvantages even in the high probability results. Moreover, even if it is a case where any highly accurate result is triggered, the said synthetic | combination probability will be 1/20 or less which is an upper limit reference | standard probability. This makes it possible to prevent the advantage from becoming excessively high.

  There is a high-winning result in which the winning probability of the win determination process is lower than other high-winning results, but the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than other high-winning results. There is a high-winning result in which the winning probability of the sorting determination process is lower than other high-winning results, instead of the winning probability of the determination process being higher than the other high-winning results. As a result, it is possible to individually generate a situation in which the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is high and a situation in which the winning probability of the distribution determination process is high, and it is possible to diversify the objects whose advantages are increased. Become.

  Depending on the type of high-accuracy result, one of the winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that of the low-accuracy result, and the other is the same as the case of the low-accuracy result A situation occurs. As a result, it is possible to make the advantage the same as in the case of the low hit result while the other is extremely higher in the advantage than in the case of the low hit result and the other in the determination process and the allocation determination process. The sharpness determination process and the distribution determination process can be sharpened.

  In the fifth high-accuracy result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is the same as in the case of the low-accuracy winning result, but the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 100%. In this case, if a winning result is obtained in the winning / deciding process, if a winning to the distributing through winning unit 35 occurs during the winning validity period of the distributing through winning unit 35, the transition to the distribution execution mode is surely performed. Will occur. In this situation, as long as the result of winning / decision determination is the winning result, the transition to the distribution execution mode is confirmed, so that the player's attention to the winning result in the winning / decision determining process can be increased. It becomes possible.

  Note that, regardless of which table group 93b to 93g is selected, the probability that the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process is 1 / of the case where the winning result is obtained in the distribution determination process. 2 is constant.

  Hereinafter, a processing configuration for enabling execution of the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process corresponding to the hit result as described above will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing special figure variation start processing in this embodiment. The special figure variation start process is executed in step S305 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14).

  In the special figure change start process, the data setting process is executed (step S1902) on condition that the number of the hold information on the special figure side is 1 or more (step S1901: YES). In the data setting process, the same process as the data setting process (step S402) in the first embodiment is executed. Thereafter, the success / failure table corresponding to the current gaming state is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S1903). Specifically, in the main side RAM 94, as a flag for specifying the gaming state by the main side MPU 92, a first high-accuracy state flag, a second high-accuracy state flag, a third high-accuracy state flag, a fourth high-accuracy state flag. A status flag and a fifth highly accurate status flag are provided. A state in which “1” is set in the first high-accuracy state flag means that the game state is after the first high-accuracy hit result and the opening / closing execution mode has occurred, and the second high-accuracy state flag A state in which “1” is set means that the game state is after the second high-accuracy hit result and the open / close execution mode has occurred, and the third high-accuracy state flag is set to “1”. Means that the game state is the game state after the opening / closing execution mode has occurred and the fourth high probability state flag is set to “1”. It means that the game state is after the winning result and the opening / closing execution mode has occurred, and when the fifth high-accuracy state flag is set to “1”, the fifth high-accuracy winning result is obtained, and then the opening / closing is executed. Game after mode occurs Means that a state, all the state where "1" to the high probability state flag not set means that a gaming state after subsequent closing execution mode will result per low probability occurs.

  In step S1903, the states of the first to fifth high-accuracy state flags in the main RAM 94 are specified, and the success / failure table is read from the table group corresponding to the determination result among the table groups 93b to 93g in the main ROM 93. Thereafter, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read in the hold information stored in the execution area 124 for the special figure, and the read numerical information of the numerical information set as the hit result in the read / failed table is read. It is determined whether or not it matches any one (step S1904).

  If the result of this determination processing is a winning result (step S1905: YES), the type table 93a is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S1906). Since only one type table 93a is provided, the type table 93a is read out. After that, the numerical information acquired from the type counter C2 is read in the hold information stored in the special chart execution area 124, and the read result numerical information set in the type table 93a is the low probability result, the first high probability. It is determined which one of the winning result, the second highly likely result, the third highly likely result, the fourth highly likely result, and the fifth highly likely result is supported (step S1907).

  After executing the type determination process, “1” is set in the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the type of the winning result specified in the type determination process (step S1908). Specifically, the main side RAM 94 has a low winning flag, a first high winning flag, a second high winning flag, a third high winning flag, a fourth high winning flag, and a fifth high winning flag. In step S1908, “1” is set to only the winning flag corresponding to the result of the type determination process among the winning flags.

  Thereafter, a stop result setting process for a winning result is executed (step S1909). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 42a in the current game round is specified from the stop result table for hit results stored in the main ROM 93 in advance, The specified information is stored in the main RAM 94. In the stop result table for winning results, the type of the pattern stop mode that is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 42a is set differently for each hit result type. In step S1909, step S1907 is changed to step S1907. The information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of the hit result specified in the above is stored in the main RAM 94. Note that the pattern stop mode may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each winning result, or a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some of the hit results. The method of selecting the stop result for the hit result in which the stop modes of a plurality of types of patterns are set is arbitrary. For example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the type counter C2.

  The processing contents of steps S1910 to S1915 are the same as the processing contents of steps S408 to S413 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 15) in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the distribution standby process in the present embodiment. The distribution standby process is executed in step S308 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14).

  In the distribution standby process, first, an update process of the distribution display unit 42c is executed (step S2001). Note that the pattern change display on the distribution display unit 42c is started in step S905 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 20), as in the first embodiment. Further, the processing content of the update processing is the same as step S1001 of the distribution standby processing (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 has occurred (step S2002). Here, the determination as to whether or not a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 has occurred occurs only in step S2002. As a result, the winning validity period to the distribution through winning portion 35 is generated only when the game round corresponding to the winning result is completed.

  When a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 has occurred (step S2002: YES), the value of the distribution counter C3 is stored in the distribution execution area 125 (step S2003). Thereafter, the states of the first to fifth high-accuracy state flags in the main side RAM 94 are specified, and the distribution table is read from the table group corresponding to the specified result among the table groups 93 b to 93 g in the main side ROM 93 to the main side RAM 94. As a result, the distribution table corresponding to the current gaming state is read (step S2004). FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sorting tables included in the low probability table group 93b and the first high probability table group 93c. In the distribution table, among the distribution counters C3 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 23” corresponds to the outlier result, and “24 to 26” corresponds to the shift to the first distribution execution mode. “27 to 29” corresponds to the shift to the second distribution execution mode. In this case, a winning result is obtained with a probability of 1/5, and a transition to the first distribution execution mode occurs with a probability of 1/2 of the winning result and 1 / of the winning result is obtained. Transition to the second distribution execution mode occurs with a probability of 2.

  Thereafter, in step S2005, it is determined whether or not the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 matches any of the numerical information set as the winning result in the read distribution table. In the distribution determination process in step S2005, when the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 matches the numerical information of the winning result, the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution are performed. It is determined whether any numerical information in the execution mode matches.

  When the result of the allocation determination process is a win result (step S2006: YES), a stop result setting process at the time of allocation win is executed (step S2007). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the distribution display unit 42 c is read from the main ROM 93. This pattern stop mode information is different from the stop mode information when the first sort execution mode occurs, when the second sort run mode occurs, and when no sort run mode occurs. Is set. In step S2007, when the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process, information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the first distribution execution mode is read and the pattern according to the mode corresponding to the information is stopped. The display of the distribution display unit 42c is controlled so as to be displayed, and when the second distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process, information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the second distribution execution mode is read out. At the same time, display control is performed on the sorting display unit 42c so that the pattern according to the mode corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, setting processing for the distribution execution mode is executed (step S2008). In the setting process, the same process as the process of steps S1005 to S1010 of the distribution standby process (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment is executed. Thereby, the transition setting to the 1st distribution execution mode or the 2nd distribution execution mode is performed.

  Thereafter, after the variable display table for the V winning determination display section is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S2009), the variable display of the pattern is started in the V winning determination display section (step S2010). In this embodiment, since the result of the distribution determination process is displayed on the distribution display unit 42c, a display for notifying whether it is the distribution execution mode and whether or not a V winning has occurred in the distribution execution mode. As a part, a V prize determination display part is provided separately. The V winning determination display unit is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is impossible to perform a complicated display like the symbol display device 44 in the V winning determination display unit, but it is possible to reduce the processing load for display control of the V winning determination display unit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a picture displayed on the V winning determination display unit, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable. The display range of the V winning determination display section is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise a player's attention degree to the symbol display apparatus 44 rather than the V prize determination display part.

  The variation display table for the V winning determination display unit is a table in which a variation display pattern of a pattern when the variation display of the pattern is performed in the V winning determination display unit is determined in advance. When the variation display of the pattern is executed in the V winning determination display section, the same variation display table is used. When the variation display of the pattern is performed in the V winning determination display portion, the variation display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern is repeated, but the variation display table for the V winning determination display portion displays the variation of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern. Control data for one turn in the variable display is set. Therefore, when the variation display of the pattern is performed in the V winning determination display section, the variation display table for the V winning determination display section is repeatedly used until the distribution execution mode is completed. In step S1101 of the distribution start process (FIG. 22) and step S1201 of the distribution process (FIG. 23) in this embodiment, the update process of the V winning determination display unit is performed instead of the update process of the distribution display unit 42c. Is executed based on the fluctuation display table.

  If the result of the allocation determination process is an outlier result (step S2006: NO), a stop result setting process for the out-of-distribution result is executed (step S2011). Specifically, information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the fact that the result of the distribution determination process is an outlier result is read from the main ROM 93. The information on the pattern stop mode is information on the pattern stop mode that is not selected in the stop result setting process (step S2007) at the time of winning the distribution. In step S2011, information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the result of the allocation determination process being an outlier result is read, and the distribution display unit 42c is displayed so that the pattern according to the mode corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed. Control.

  Thereafter, a flag clear process is executed (step S2012). In the flag clear process, “0” is cleared for various flags used in the current game round and the current winning validity period. Also, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0” (step S2013). As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

  Here, if a result of divergence is found in the distribution determination process, the special figure change start process is executed without shifting to the distribution execution mode, but the game state shift process is not executed. Therefore, if a result of losing is determined in the allocation determination process, the game state transition corresponding to the winning result generated in the game round that is the trigger for the transition to the winning valid period of the current distribution through winning portion 35 is made. That is, there is no change in the combination of the winning probability in the success / failure determination process and the winning probability in the distribution determination process.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the distribution end process in this embodiment. The distribution end process is executed in step S1222 in the distribution process (FIG. 23).

  In the distribution end process, when “1” is set in the V winning flag of the main RAM 94 (step S2101: YES), a stop result setting process when a V winning occurs is executed (step S2102). In the stop result setting process, information on the pattern stop mode of the V winning determination display section corresponding to the fact that a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 is read out. The information on the stop mode of the pattern is information on the stop mode that is not selected in the stop result setting process when no V prize is generated in step S2108. As a result, the variation display of the pattern is stopped while the pattern corresponding to the occurrence of the V winning is displayed in the current distribution execution mode in the V winning determination display section. Also, in step S2102, information on different stop modes is read depending on whether the current distribution execution mode is the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode. That is, the V winning detection sensor 69 detects a game ball in the first distribution execution mode and the V winning detection sensor 69 detects a game ball in the second distribution execution mode. The pattern stop mode when the display of the variation of the pattern in the winning determination display section is different is different. As a result, it is possible to grasp from the display mode of the V winning determination display section whether the subsequent opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the occurrence of the V winning in which distribution execution mode. . In addition, since the mode of the picture stopped and displayed in the V winning determination display section is maintained until the next variation display of the pattern in the V winning determination display section is started, the display is continued in the subsequent opening / closing execution mode. The Thus, by confirming the V winning determination display section at an arbitrary timing during the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to determine in which distribution execution mode the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the occurrence of the V winning. It becomes possible to confirm.

  Thereafter, in steps S2103 to S2107, the same processing as that in steps S1307 to S1311 of the distribution end processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment is executed. Thereby, it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  On the other hand, if “1” is not set in the V winning flag of the main RAM 94 (step S2101: NO), a stop result setting process when no V winning is generated is executed (step S2108). In the stop result setting process, information on the pattern stop mode of the V winning determination display portion corresponding to the fact that no game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 is read out. Thereby, the variation display of the picture is stopped in a state where the picture corresponding to the fact that the V prize has not occurred in the current distribution execution mode is displayed on the V prize determination display unit. Regardless of whether or not the pattern is stopped and displayed in the V winning determination display section, whether or not it is in the game time execution period and the open / close execution mode, until the next variation display of the pattern in the V winning determination display section is started. Maintained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the allocation execution mode that is not accompanied by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode ends or when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the display up to that point in the V winning determination display section It may be configured to be erased. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which nothing is displayed on the V winning determination display portion, or a display indicating that the state is not changing may be continued.

  Thereafter, a flag clear process is executed (step S2109). In the flag clear process, “0” is cleared for various flags used in the current game round, the current winning validity period, and the current distribution execution mode. Further, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0” (step S2110). As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

  Here, when the V winning is not generated in the distribution execution mode, the special figure change start process is executed without shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, but the game state shift process is not executed. Therefore, when no V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode, the game state transition corresponding to the winning result generated in the game round that has been the trigger for the transition to the current distribution execution mode, that is, the success / failure determination process. No change in the combination of the winning probability and the winning probability of the distribution determination process occurs.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing in the present embodiment. Note that the game state transition process is executed in step S1702 in the special electricity end process (FIG. 28).

  In the game state transition process, when “1” is set in any of the first high-winning flag, the second high-winning flag, the third high-winning flag, and the fourth high-winning flag in the main RAM 94 (Step S2201: YES), among the first high-accuracy state flag, the second high-accuracy state flag, the third high-accuracy state flag, and the fourth high-accuracy state flag of the main side RAM 94, a high value in which “1” is set “1” is set to the high probability state flag corresponding to the winning flag (step S2202). As a result, the high-accuracy table groups 93c to 93f corresponding to the current high-accuracy hit result are referred to in the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process. The state of the high probability state flag set here is maintained until the game state transition process (FIG. 37) is executed next time.

  Thereafter, “1” is set to the first high frequency support flag of the main RAM 94 (step S2203). Thereby, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high frequency support mode. The state where “1” is set in the first high-frequency support flag is held until the game state transition process (FIG. 37) is executed next time. However, as in the first embodiment, if the winning through period winning portion 35 for allocation is one of the valid period, the allocation execution mode, and the opening / closing execution mode, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode until immediately before that. Regardless of whether it is set, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.

  Thereafter, a state transition command corresponding to the high-accuracy state flag for which “1” is set this time is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S2204). When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the state transition command from the main side MPU 92, the sound light side ROM 104 stores the control table corresponding to the current state transition command in the table setting process (step S501) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16). To the sound light side RAM 105. As a result, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 is executed in a manner corresponding to the current highly accurate result, and the sound output control of the speaker unit 74 is executed in a manner corresponding to the current highly successful result. The sound light side MPU 103 transmits a command corresponding to the state transition command received this time to the display side MPU 113. When the display side MPU 113 receives the command, the display side MPU 113 reads the display pattern table corresponding to the command in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), and executes display control of the symbol display device 44 based on the table.

  The display content of the symbol display device 44 corresponding to the gaming state in which the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process are executed using the second high probability table group 93d will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. To do. As shown in FIG. 38A, the probability display area 151 is displayed on the symbol display device 44 in the situation where the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process are executed. In the probability display area 151, a probability-corresponding image corresponding to the winning probability of the current determination process is displayed. In this case, the probability-corresponding image is displayed based on the winning probability of the success / failure determination process in the gaming state in which the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process are executed using the low probability table group 93b. Specifically, when the second high-accuracy table group 93d is referred to, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is ¼, and when the low-accuracy table group 93b is referred to, the success / failure determination process is won. It is 10 times the 1/40 probability. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the second high probability table group 93d is referred to, a “10 times” image is displayed in the probability display area 151 as the probability corresponding image. On the other hand, the winning probability of the sorting determination process including the symbol display device 44 is not notified. This makes it possible for the player to predict the winning probability of the sorting determination process while clearly indicating the winning probability of the winner determination process to the player.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 37), when “1” is set in the fifth highly-acceptable winning flag of the main RAM 94 (step S2205: YES), the fifth highly probable flag of the main RAM 94 is determined. Is set to “1” (step S2206). As a result, the fifth high-accuracy table group 93g is referred to in the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process. Similarly to step S2203, “1” is set to the first high frequency support flag of the main RAM 94 (step S2207). Thereby, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high frequency support mode. Thereafter, the common transfer command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S2208). The processing executed by the sound light side MPU 103 when the common transfer command is received will be described later.

  In the game state transition process, when “1” is not set in any of the first to fifth winning flags of the main side RAM 94 (step S2205: NO), the first to fifth high probability state flags of the main side RAM 94 are set. Is cleared to “0” (step S2209). As a result, the low probability table group 93b is referred to in the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process. Further, “1” is set to the second high-frequency support flag provided in the main RAM 94, and “100” is set to the end reference counter provided in the main RAM 94 (step S2210). Thereby, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high frequency support mode. Further, the value of the end reference counter is decremented by 1 every time one game is consumed, and when the value of the end reference counter becomes “0”, the second high frequency support flag is cleared to “0”. As a result, when 100 game times have been consumed, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. Thereafter, similar to step S2208, a common transfer command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S2211).

  When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the common transfer command from the main side MPU 92, the sound table MPU 103 receives the control table corresponding to the common transfer command from the sound light side ROM 104 in the table setting process (step S501) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16). Read to the light side RAM 105. As a result, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 is executed in such a manner that the player cannot identify which of the low probability table group 93b and the fifth high probability table group 93g is the target of use. Sound output control of the speaker unit 74 is executed. Further, the sound light side MPU 103 transmits a command corresponding to the common transfer command to the display side MPU 113. When the display side MPU 113 receives the command, the display side MPU 113 reads the display pattern table corresponding to the command in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), and executes display control of the symbol display device 44 based on the table.

  The display content of the symbol display device 44 corresponding to the gaming state in which the winning / failing determination process and the distribution determination process are executed using the low probability table group 93b or the fifth high probability table group 93g is shown in FIG. This will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram. As shown in FIG. 38B, a “normal” image is displayed as a probability-corresponding image in the probability display area 151 of the symbol display device 44. Further, since the support mode of the guidance unit 52 is set to the high-frequency support mode regardless of whether the result is the low probability result or the fifth result, the operation mode of the guidance unit 52 is determined. , The player cannot grasp which of the low probability table group 93b and the fifth high probability table group 93g is to be used. As a result, the player plays the game while predicting which one of the low probability table group 93b and the fifth high probability table group 93g is to be used.

  In particular, when the fifth high probability table group 93g is the target of use, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is the same as that of the low probability table group 93b, but the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 100%. It has become. That is, if the hit result is a hit / fail judgment process, the sorting execution mode is surely generated. Then, when “normal” is displayed as the probability-corresponding image in the probability display area 151 of the symbol display device 44, the player plays a game while expecting that the fifth high probability table group 93g is set. It will be.

  On the other hand, when 100 game times are consumed when the low probability result is achieved, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the low frequency support mode while the fifth high probability result is obtained. Even if 100 game times are consumed, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 is maintained in the high frequency support mode. Thus, immediately after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the player can predict which one of the low probability table group 93b and the fifth high probability table group 93g is to be used, and the opening / closing execution mode. When the game times are repeatedly executed without causing the shift to, it is possible to make the player recognize which table group is the use target.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process may vary, and the probability that the winning of the transition to the distribution execution mode may be varied in the distribution determination process. . This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of each determination process. Further, both the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability that the winning determination is the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process are the situations where the low probability table group 93b is used. There can be different probabilities. As a result, it is possible to create a situation where the execution modes of both the success / failure determination process and the allocation determination process are fluctuating at the same time. It is possible to make it different. Therefore, the equalization of the game is suppressed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the case of the present embodiment, in order for the transition to the opening / closing execution mode to occur, it is necessary that at least the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the transition determination mode to be selected in the distribution determination process. is there. Therefore, there are a plurality of lottery processes targeted by the player who expects the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the probability that the probability of winning in the success / failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process will affect the probability of switching to the opening / closing execution mode. . In this case, as described above, the low probability table group 93b is used for both the probability of the winning result in the success / failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process. The probability can be different from the situation. As a result, it is possible to diversify the transition probability to the opening / closing execution mode as compared with the configuration in which only one of the probability of the success / failure determination process and the probability of the distribution determination process varies. In addition, even if the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition execution mode in the distribution determination process are not greatly changed, the probability of switching to the opening / closing execution mode is greatly changed. It becomes possible to make it.

  There are three or more types of probabilities that a winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and probabilities of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process. This makes it possible to diversify the probabilities of winning results in each determination process and also diversify the synthesis probabilities of these determination processes.

  When the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process are executed in a manner corresponding to any of the high-reliability results, the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process are executed in a manner corresponding to the low-reliability result. The synthesis probability is higher than that. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of achieving any one of the high probability results.

  Depending on the type of the high-accuracy hit result, the combination type of the winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the setting modes of the winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process, and accordingly, it is possible to diversify the game.

  The synthesis probability is different depending on the type of the high-accuracy hit result. This makes it possible to produce advantages and disadvantages even in the high probability results. Moreover, even if it is a case where any highly accurate result is triggered, the said synthetic | combination probability will be 1/20 or less which is an upper limit reference | standard probability. This makes it possible to prevent the advantage from becoming excessively high.

  There is a high-winning result in which the winning probability of the win determination process is lower than other high-winning results, but the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than other high-winning results. There is a high-winning result in which the winning probability of the sorting determination process is lower than other high-winning results, instead of the winning probability of the determination process being higher than the other high-winning results. As a result, it is possible to individually generate a situation in which the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is high and a situation in which the winning probability of the distribution determination process is high, and it is possible to diversify the objects whose advantages are increased. Become.

  Depending on the type of high-accuracy result, one of the winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that of the low-accuracy result, and the other is the same as the case of the low-accuracy result A situation occurs. As a result, it is possible to make the advantage the same as in the case of the low hit result while the other is extremely higher in the advantage than in the case of the low hit result and the other in the determination process and the allocation determination process, It is possible to add sharpness by the determination process and the determination process.

  In the fifth high-accuracy result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is the same as in the case of the low-accuracy winning result, but the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 100%. In this case, if a winning result is obtained in the winning / deciding process, if a winning to the distributing through winning unit 35 occurs during the winning validity period of the distributing through winning unit 35, the transition to the distribution execution mode is surely performed. Will occur. In this situation, as long as the result of winning / decision determination is the winning result, the transition to the distribution execution mode is confirmed, so that the player's attention to the winning result in the winning / decision determining process can be increased. It becomes possible.

  When the V winning is generated, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability that the selection to the distribution execution mode is won in the distribution determination process may be collectively changed. This makes it easy for the player to understand the timing at which each probability varies.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration for setting the winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is different from that of the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing in the present embodiment. Note that the game state transition process is executed in step S1702 in the special electricity end process (FIG. 28).

  In the game state transition process, if the game result of the game times that occurred before the current open / close execution mode is a highly accurate result (step S2301: YES), a probability lottery process for determination of success / failure is executed (step S2302). In the present embodiment, there is only one type of highly accurate hit result. In the probability determination lottery process, the winning probability of the determination process is determined by lottery. FIG. 40A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning probability of the success / failure determination process which can be selected in the probability determination lottery process for the determination of success / failure.

  As the selection target winning probabilities in the success / failure determination process, 1/4, 1/5, 1/8, 1/10, and 1/20, which are higher than the winning probabilities at the low probability, are set. The lottery probabilities of the selection target winning probabilities in the probability lottery process for determination of success / failure are all the same, and specifically, the probability that each selection target win probability is selected is 20%. In the probability determination lottery determination process, first, a probability determination random determination table is read from the main ROM 93, and then numerical information is acquired from a determination lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 94. Then, the obtained numerical information is collated against a probability lottery table for determination of success / failure.

  After executing the probability determination lottery process (step S2302), the selected winning probability is set to “1” in the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability selected in the probability lottery process. Is set as the winning probability of the determination processing (step S2303). Thus, until step S2303 is executed next time, in step S1904 of the special figure change start process (FIG. 33), the success / failure determination process is executed with the winning probability corresponding to the flag set to “1”.

  Thereafter, a probability determination lottery process for distribution determination is executed (step S2304). In the distribution determination probability lottery process, the winning determination probability of the distribution determination process is determined by lottery. FIG. 40B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning probability of the distribution determination process that can be selected in the distribution determination probability lottery process.

  1/5, 2/5, 3/5, 4/5, and 1/1 are set as selection target winning probabilities in the distribution determination process. All the selection target winning probabilities in the allocation determination probability lottery process are all the same. Specifically, the probability that each selection target winning probability is selected is 20%. In the probability determination lottery process for distribution determination, first, a probability determination lottery table for distribution determination is read from the main ROM 93, and then numerical information is obtained from a distribution lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 94. Then, the acquired numerical information is collated with a probability lottery table for distribution determination.

  After the distribution determination probability lottery process (step S2304) is executed, the product of the winning probability of the success / failure determination process set in step S2303 and the winning probability of the distribution determination process selected in step S2304 is calculated. Calculate (step S2305). And it is determined whether the synthetic | combination probability of the integration result is below a predetermined value (step S2306). The predetermined value is set to 1/10. Therefore, for example, when 1/4 is selected as the winning probability of the success / failure determination process, and when 1/5 or 2/5 is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process, the integration result is predetermined. When 3/5, 4/5 or 1/1 is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process, the integration result is not less than the predetermined value. Further, for example, when 1/10 or 1/20 is selected as the winning probability of the success / failure determination process, the above integration result is predetermined regardless of which winning probability is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process. Below the value.

  If the integration result is not less than or equal to the predetermined value (step S2306: NO), a probability determination process for distribution determination is executed (step S2307). In the probability correction process, a winning probability having a value lower than the winning probability of the currently selected allocation determination process and the second largest value of the winning probability is set as a selection target. And the process of step S2305 and step S2306 is performed again about the winning probability, and the process of step S2305 to step S2307 is repeated until the synthetic probability of the integration result becomes a predetermined value or less.

  If the integration result is less than or equal to the predetermined value (step S2306: YES), the current state is selected by setting “1” in the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability of the currently selected distribution determination process. The winning probability is set as the winning probability of the distribution determination process (step S2308). Thereafter, similarly to steps S2203 and S2207 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 37) in the fourth embodiment, “1” is set to the first high frequency support flag of the main RAM 94 (step S2309). Thereby, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high frequency support mode. In addition, a state transition command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S2310). As a result, the winning probability of the determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process selected this time in the display light emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74, and the symbol display device 44 are notified.

  In the game state transition process, when the game result of the game times that occurred before the current open / close execution mode is a low probability result (step S2301: NO), the initial probability setting process of the success / failure determination is executed (step S2311). ). In the setting process, the main-side RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/40, which is a winning probability lower than all the selection target winning probabilities that can be selected when a high-winning result is obtained. Execute flag setting processing. In addition, an initial probability setting process for the distribution determination is executed (step S2312). In the setting process, the flag of the main RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability of the allocation determination process is 1/5, which is the lowest winning probability of the selection target winning probabilities that can be selected when a highly accurate winning result is obtained. Execute the setting process.

  Thereafter, similarly to step S2210 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 37) in the fourth embodiment, “1” is set in the second high frequency support flag of the main RAM 94 and the end reference counter of the main RAM 94 is set. “100” is set (step S2313). Thereby, it becomes a high frequency support mode which made 100 game times an upper limit. Further, the low-accuracy transition command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S2314). Thus, the display light emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74, and the symbol display device 44 are informed that both the winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process are the lowest probabilities.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process are determined in the individual lottery process. Selected. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the mode of combination of each probability.

  If the combined probability obtained by integrating the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability that the assignment determination mode is won in the distribution determination process is greater than a predetermined value, the combined probability is a predetermined value. In the distribution determination process, the probability of winning the transfer to the distribution execution mode is corrected as follows. With this, in the configuration in which each of the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process are selected in the individual lottery process. Their combined probabilities can be kept within a predetermined probability range.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration for setting the winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is different from that of the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special figure finalizing process in this embodiment. The special figure finalizing process is executed in step S307 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14).

  When the final stop period has elapsed (step S2401: YES), and the game result of the current game round is an outlier result (step S2402: NO), the special figure special electricity counter value is cleared to “0”. (Step S2403). As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

  If the final stop period has elapsed (step S2401: YES), and the game result of the current game round is a winning result (step S2402: YES), a variation display table for the distribution display unit 42c is displayed. After reading from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S2404), the distribution display unit 42c starts to display the variation of the picture (step S2405). Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1 (step S2406). Thereafter, a distribution display start command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S2407). The processing contents of these steps S2404 to S2407 are the same as the processing contents of steps S904 to S907 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

  Thereafter, a first game state transition process is executed (step S2408). That is, the first game state transition process is executed when the game times that are the winning results are completed. In other words, the first game state transition process is executed regardless of the winning validity period of the distribution through winning unit 35 and the game contents in the distribution execution mode. As will be described later, in the first game state transition process, a process for changing the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is executed, but the first game state transition process is the game contents in the winning validity period and the allocation execution mode. By being executed independently, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process can be changed even if the shift to the sorting execution mode does not occur, and can be changed even if the shift to the opening / closing execution mode does not occur.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the first game state transition process. First, it is determined whether or not the result is a highly accurate hit result of the determination process (step S2501). In the present embodiment, in the same way as in the first embodiment, either the high probability result or the low probability result is selected in the type determination process that is executed when the hit result is a hit result. Even when a win result is obtained in the distribution determination process, either a high-winning result or a low-winning result is selected using a lottery counter and a lottery table that are different from the type determination process. That is, there are a high probability result and a low probability result of the success / failure determination process, and a high probability result and a low probability result of the distribution determination process.

  If the result is a high-accuracy hit result of the success / failure determination process (step S2501: YES), a probability lottery process for determination of the success / failure is executed (step S2502). In the probability determination lottery process for the success / failure determination, similarly to step S2302 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 39) in the fifth embodiment, the selection target winning probabilities of the determination process for the success / failure are set to 1/4 and 1/5. , 1/8, 1/10, and 1/20, one winning probability is selected.

  Thereafter, the product of the winning probability of the success / failure determination process selected in step S2502 and the current winning probability of the distribution determination process is calculated (step S2503). Then, it is determined whether or not the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2504). The predetermined value is set to 1/10. Therefore, for example, when 1/1 is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process, the integration result is a predetermined value when 1/10 or 1/20 is selected as the winning probability of the determination process. In the case where 1/4, 1/5, or 1/8 is selected as the winning probability of the success / failure determination process, the integration result does not become a predetermined value or less.

  When the synthesis probability of the integration result is not less than or equal to the predetermined value (step S2504: NO), a probability correction process for determination of success / failure is executed (step S2505). In the probability correction process, a winning probability having a winning probability lower than the winning probability of the currently selected winning / failing determination process and the next largest value is set as a selection target. And the process of step S2503 and step S2504 is performed again about the winning probability, and the process of step S2503-step S2505 is repeated until the synthetic | combination probability of the said integration result becomes below a predetermined value. When the composite probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2504: YES), the current state is set by setting “1” to the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability of the currently selected success / failure determination process. The selected winning probability is set as the winning probability of the determination process (step S2506).

  If the result is not a high-accuracy result of the determination process (step S2501: NO), an initial probability setting process for the determination is performed (step S2507). In the setting process, the main-side RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/40, which is a winning probability lower than all the selection target winning probabilities that can be selected when a high-winning result is obtained. Execute flag setting processing.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the second game state transition process. Note that the second game state transition process is executed instead of the game state transition process in step S1702 of the special electricity end process (FIG. 28).

  If the result is a high probability result of the sorting determination process (step S2601: YES), a probability determination lottery process for sorting determination is executed (step S2602). In the probability determination lottery process for the distribution determination, 1/5, 2 set as the selection target winning probability of the distribution determination process, as in step S2304 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 39) in the fifth embodiment. One winning probability is selected from / 5, 3/5, 4/5, and 1/1.

  Thereafter, the product of the current winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process selected in step S2602 is calculated (step S2603). And it is determined whether the synthetic | combination probability of the integration result is below a predetermined value (step S2604). The predetermined value is set to 1/10 as already described. Therefore, for example, when 1/4 is selected as the winning probability of the success / failure determination process, the integration result is a predetermined value when 1/5 or 2/5 is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process. When 3/5, 4/5, or 1/1 is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process, the integration result does not become a predetermined value or less.

  When the synthesis probability of the integration result is not less than or equal to the predetermined value (step S2604: NO), a distribution correction probability correction process is executed (step S2605). In the probability correction process, a winning probability having a winning probability lower than the winning probability of the currently selected distribution determining process and the next largest value is set as a selection target. And the process of step S2603 and step S2604 is performed again about the winning probability, and the process of step S2603 to step S2605 is repeated until the combined probability of the integration result becomes a predetermined value or less.

  When the synthesis probability of the integration result is less than or equal to a predetermined value (step S2604: YES), by setting “1” in the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the win probability of the currently selected distribution determination process, The currently selected winning probability is set as the winning probability of the sorting determination process (step S2606). Thereafter, similarly to steps S2203 and S2207 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 37) in the fourth embodiment, “1” is set to the first high frequency support flag of the main RAM 94 (step S2607). Thereby, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high frequency support mode. Further, a state transition command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S2608). As a result, the winning probability of the determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process selected this time in the display light emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74, and the symbol display device 44 are notified.

  If it is not the high probability result of the allocation determination process (step S2601: NO), an initial probability setting process of the allocation determination is executed (step S2609). In the setting process, the flag of the main RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability of the allocation determination process is 1/5, which is the lowest winning probability of the selection target winning probabilities that can be selected when a highly accurate winning result is obtained. Execute the setting process.

  Thereafter, similarly to step S2210 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 37) in the fourth embodiment, “1” is set in the second high frequency support flag of the main RAM 94 and the end reference counter of the main RAM 94 is set. “100” is set (step S2610). Thereby, it becomes a high frequency support mode which made 100 game times an upper limit. Further, the low-accuracy transition command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S2611). Thus, the display light emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74, and the symbol display device 44 are informed that both the winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process are the lowest probabilities.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the change in the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process is performed in the distribution execution mode when the game times that have been the winning result in the corresponding determination process are finished. It can be executed regardless of whether or not it is executed and whether or not a V prize is generated. On the other hand, the change of the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process can be executed when the opening / closing execution mode that has occurred due to the V winning is completed. That is, a situation in which the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process varies and a situation in which the probability of winning the transition execution mode in the distribution determination process varies individually. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the setting mode of each probability.

  In addition, when the combined probability obtained by integrating the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is greater than a predetermined value, the combined probability is The probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process or the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is corrected so as to be equal to or less than the predetermined value. As a result, the situation in which the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process varies and the situation in which the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process varies individually. However, it is possible to keep the composite probability within a predetermined probability range.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configurations of the first game state transition process and the second game state transition process are different from those of the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the sixth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the first game state transition process in the present embodiment. The first gaming state transition process is executed in step S2408 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment.

  First, it is determined whether or not the value of the high-accuracy continuation number counter for determining whether or not there is provided in the main RAM 94 is “0” (step S2701). In the present embodiment, unlike the sixth embodiment, when a winning result is obtained in the success / failure determination process and a high-accuracy result is selected in the type determination process, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is higher than that in the normal gaming state. The situation continues thereafter until the first gaming state transition process occurs for a predetermined number of times. One, two, and three times are set as the number of continuations, and the number of continuations is determined by lottery. Even if the low probability result is selected by the type determination process in a situation where the number of continuations is one or more, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is not set to the winning probability corresponding to the low probability result. The high-accuracy continuation counter for determining whether or not it is correct is a counter for the main MPU 92 to specify the continuation count.

  When the value of the high-accuracy continuation count counter for the determination is “0” (step S2701: YES), on the condition that the high-accuracy hit result is selected in the type determination process in the current game round (step S2702: YES), a lottery process for determining the number of times of success / failure is executed (step S2703). As already described, once, twice, and three times are set as the number of continuations of the situation where the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is higher than that in the normal gaming state. In the lottery process for determining the number of times of success / failure determination, the lottery table corresponding to the lottery process is read from the main ROM 93, and numerical information is acquired from a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 94. By collating with the lottery table, the number of continuation determinations is selected from 1, 2, and 3. Then, the selected number of times of success / failure determination is set in a high-accuracy continuation number counter for determination of success / failure (step S2704).

  Thereafter, a probability lottery process for determination of success / failure is executed (step S2705). In the probability determination lottery process for the success / failure determination, similarly to step S2302 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 39) in the fifth embodiment, the selection target winning probabilities of the determination process for the success / failure are set to 1/4 and 1/5. , 1/8, 1/10, and 1/20, one winning probability is selected. These selection target winning probabilities are higher than the winning probabilities set in the case of a low probability result.

  Thereafter, the product of the winning probability of the success / failure determination process selected in step S2705 and the current winning probability of the distribution determination process is calculated (step S2706). And it is determined whether the synthetic | combination probability of the integration result is below a predetermined value (step S2707). The predetermined value is set to 1/10. Therefore, for example, when 1/1 is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process, the integration result is a predetermined value when 1/10 or 1/20 is selected as the winning probability of the determination process. In the case where 1/4, 1/5, or 1/8 is selected as the winning probability of the success / failure determination process, the integration result does not become a predetermined value or less.

  If the integration probability of the integration result is not less than or equal to the predetermined value (step S2707: NO), a probability correction process for determining whether or not it is correct is executed (step S2708). In the probability correction process, a winning probability having a winning probability lower than the winning probability of the currently selected winning / failing determination process and the next largest value is set as a selection target. And the process of step S2706 and step S2707 is performed again about the winning probability, and the process of step S2706-step S2708 is repeated until the synthetic | combination probability of the said integration result becomes below a predetermined value. When the composite probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2707: YES), the current state is set by setting “1” in the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability of the currently selected success / failure determination process. The selected winning probability is set as the winning probability of the winning / failing determination process (step S2709).

  When the value of the high-accuracy continuation number counter for determination of success / failure is not “0” (step S2701: NO), 1 is subtracted from the value of the high-probability continuation number counter for determination of success / failure (step S2710). If the value of the high-probability continuation count counter after the subtraction is not “0” (step S2711: NO), the processes of steps S2705 to S2709 already described are executed. As a result, in the situation where the number of continuations is 1 or more, the winning probability of the winning / determining determination process is not fixed. The winning probability of the determination process can vary.

  On the other hand, if the value of the high-accuracy continuation count counter for the determination of success after “1” is “0” (step S2711: YES), an initial probability setting process for the determination of success / failure is executed (step S2712). In the setting process, the main-side RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/40, which is a winning probability lower than all the selection target winning probabilities that can be selected when a high-winning result is obtained. Execute flag setting processing.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the second game state transition process in the present embodiment. Note that the second game state transition process is executed instead of the game state transition process in step S1702 of the special electricity end process (FIG. 28).

  First, it is determined whether or not the value of the high-accuracy continuation counter for distribution determination provided in the main RAM 94 is “0” (step S2801). In the present embodiment, unlike the sixth embodiment described above, when the winning determination result is selected in the distribution determination process and the winning probability is selected in the distribution determination process, the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than in the normal gaming state. However, it continues until the second gaming state transition process occurs for a predetermined number of times thereafter. As the number of continuations, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 are set, and the number of continuations is determined by lottery. Even if the low probability result is selected by the distribution determination process in a situation where the number of continuations is one or more, the winning probability of the distribution determination process is not set to the winning probability corresponding to the low probability result. The highly reliable continuation count counter for distribution determination is a counter for the main MPU 92 to specify the continuation count.

  When the value of the high-precision continuation count counter for the distribution determination is “0” (step S2801: YES), on the condition that the high-accuracy hit result is selected in the current distribution determination process (step S2802: YES). ), The distribution determination continuation number lottery process is executed (step S2803). As already described, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as the number of continuations of the situation in which the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than the normal gaming state. In the lottery process for the number of times of continuation determination, the lottery table corresponding to the lottery process is read from the main ROM 93 and numerical information is acquired from a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 94. Is checked against the lottery table to select one, two, three, four, and five times for the distribution determination. Then, the selected number of continuations of the allocation determination is set in the highly accurate continuation count counter of the allocation determination (step S2804).

  Thereafter, a probability determination lottery process for distribution determination is executed (step S2805). In the probability determination lottery process for the distribution determination, 1/5, 2 set as the selection target winning probability of the distribution determination process, as in step S2304 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 39) in the fifth embodiment. One winning probability is selected from / 5, 3/5, 4/5, and 1/1.

  Thereafter, the product of the current winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process selected in step S2805 is calculated (step S2806). And it is determined whether the synthetic | combination probability of the integration result is below a predetermined value (step S2807). The predetermined value is set to 1/10 as already described. Therefore, for example, when 1/4 is selected as the winning probability of the success / failure determination process, the combined probability of the integration result when 1/5 or 2/5 is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process Is equal to or less than a predetermined value, and 3/5, 4/5, or 1/1 is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process, the combined probability of the integration result is not less than the predetermined value.

  When the synthesis probability of the integration result is not less than or equal to the predetermined value (step S2807: NO), a distribution correction probability correction process is executed (step S2808). In the probability correction process, a winning probability having a winning probability lower than the winning probability of the currently selected distribution determining process and the next largest value is set as a selection target. And the process of step S2806 and step S2808 is performed again about the winning probability, and the process of step S2806 to step S2808 is repeated until the combined probability of the integration result becomes a predetermined value or less.

  When the synthesis probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2807: YES), by setting “1” in the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the selection probability of the currently selected distribution determination process, The currently selected winning probability is set as the winning probability of the sorting determination process (step S2809).

  If the value of the high-accuracy continuation counter for distribution determination is not “0” (step S2801: NO), 1 is subtracted from the value of the high-probability continuation counter for distribution determination (step S2810). If the value of the high-probability continuation number counter after the subtraction is not “0” (step S2811: NO), the processes of steps S2805 to S2809 already described are executed. As a result, in the situation where the number of continuations is 1 or more, the winning probability of the sorting determination process is not fixed, but the winning probability of the sorting determination process may fluctuate every time a transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs. It will be.

  On the other hand, when the value of the highly accurate continuation count counter for the distribution determination after 1 subtraction is “0” (step S2811: YES), an initial probability setting process for the distribution determination is executed (step S2812). In the setting process, the flag of the main RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability of the allocation determination process is 1/5, which is the lowest winning probability of the selection target winning probabilities that can be selected when a highly accurate winning result is obtained. Execute the setting process.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, when the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process becomes higher than when the probability is low, the situation is generated in the success / failure determination process for the number of continuation results. Continue until. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of generating a highly accurate result of the success / failure determination process. In addition, there are a plurality of types of continuation times, and the continuation times are selected by lottery. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the situation in which the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process is higher than when the probability is low continues.

  Even in a situation where the situation in which the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process is higher than that at the low probability continues, the probability can vary. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the setting mode of the probability.

  In the distribution determination process, when the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode can be higher than when the probability is low, the situation continues until the opening / closing execution mode is generated for the number of continuous times. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of generating a highly accurate result of the sorting determination process. In addition, there are a plurality of types of continuation times, and the continuation times are selected by lottery. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the situation in which the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process can be higher than when the probability is low is continued.

  Even in a situation where there is a situation where the probability of winning the transition to the sorting execution mode in the sorting determination process can continue to be higher than when the probability is low, the probability can vary. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the setting mode of the probability.

  The continuation count for the success / failure determination process and the continuation count for the distribution determination process are individually determined, and the types of continuation counts that can be selected are also different. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the setting mode of each probability.

  In addition, when the combined probability obtained by integrating the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is greater than a predetermined value, the combined probability is The probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process or the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is corrected so as to be equal to or less than the predetermined value. Accordingly, even if the continuation count for the success / failure determination process and the continuation count for the distribution determination process are individually determined and the types of continuation counts that can be selected are also different, It is possible to keep the composite probability of the above within a predetermined probability range.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36, the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs surely. However, in this embodiment, the V winning detection sensor Even if a game ball is detected at 69, the transition to the opening / closing execution mode may not occur. Further, in the present embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, even if a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs during the winning validity period of the distributing through winning portion 35, the distribution execution mode is entered. It may happen that no transition occurs. In addition, the probability of winning the shift to the distribution execution mode when the winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs varies according to the gaming state. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fourth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

  First, the types of hit results in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of hit results in the present embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the winning result is selected in the type determination process (step S405) in the main MPU 92 by being the winning result in the determination process (step S403) in the main MPU 92. Although there are a plurality of types of winning results that are common to the start of the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35, the winning probability of the success / failure determination processing, the winning probability of the distribution determination processing, and the V winning This is an opportunity to change the combination type of the winning probabilities of the V winning lottery process executed when the event occurs. However, even if the type of winning result is selected in the type determination process, it corresponds to the selected winning result as long as there is no transition to the open / close execution mode triggered by the game time in which the type determination process is executed Each winning probability is not set.

  As in the case of the fourth embodiment, the hit results are assigned to the low hit results, the first high hit results, the second high hit results, the third high hit results, There are 4 high-accuracy results and 5th high-accuracy results. In the case of a low-winning result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/20, the winning probability of the allocation determination process is 1/5, and the winning probability of the V winning lottery process is 1/4. In this case, the value of the combined probability obtained by integrating the winning probabilities is 1/400. In the case of the first highly successful winning result, the winning probability of the winning / failing determination process is 1/4, the winning probability of the distribution determining process is 1/5, and the winning probability of the V winning lottery process is 1/2. Become. In this case, the value of the combined probability obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/40. In the case of the second high-accuracy result, the winning probability of the winner determination process is 1/8, the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 2/5, and the winning probability of the V winning lottery process is 1/2. Become. In this case, the value of the combined probability obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/40. In the case of the third high-accuracy result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/10, the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 2/5, and the winning probability of the V winning lottery process is 1/3. Become. In this case, the value of the combined probability obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/65. In the case of the fourth high-accuracy result, the winning probability of the winning / decision determination process is 1/20, the winning probability of the distribution determining process is 4/5, and the winning probability of the V winning lottery process is 1/3. Become. In this case, the value of the combined probability obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/65. In the case of the fifth high probability result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/40, which is a lower probability than the case of the low probability result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 1/1. Thus, the winning probability of the V winning lottery process is 1/1. In this case, the value of the combined probability obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/40.

  Note that the probability that the first sorting execution mode is selected in the sorting determination process is fixed to 1/2 of the winning result in the sorting determination process, regardless of which winning result is selected. It has become.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the distribution processing in this embodiment. The distribution process is executed in step S310 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14).

  In the distribution process, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 (step S2901: YES), a V winning lottery process is executed (step S2902). In the V winning lottery process, the V winning lottery table corresponding to the current lottery state is read from the main ROM 93, the numerical information of the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is read out. Is compared with the read lottery table for V winning. If the result of the V winning lottery process is V winning winning (step S2903: YES), “1” is set to the V winning flag in the main RAM 94 (step S2904). As a result, as in the first embodiment, when the current distribution execution mode ends, the mode changes to the opening / closing execution mode. In step S 2905, the V winning command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2901, a negative determination is made in step S2903, or if the processing in step S2905 is executed, other processing is executed (step S2906). In other processes, the processes of steps S1201 to S1205 and steps S1209 to S1222 of the distribution process (FIG. 23) in the first embodiment are executed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, when the success / failure determination process, the distribution determination process, and the V winning lottery process are executed in a manner corresponding to any high-winning result, the low-winning result is supported. In this manner, the combination probability is higher than the case where the success / failure determination process, the distribution determination process, and the V winning lottery process are executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of achieving any one of the high probability results.

  Depending on the type of the high-accuracy winning result, the types of combinations of the winning probabilities in the success / failure determination process, the winning probabilities in the distribution determination process, and the winning probabilities in the V winning lottery process are different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the setting mode of the winning probability of the winning / failing determination process, the winning probability of the distribution determining process, and the winning probability of the V winning lottery process, and accordingly, the game can be diversified. Become.

  The synthesis probability is different depending on the type of the high-accuracy hit result. This makes it possible to produce advantages and disadvantages even in the high probability results. Moreover, even if it is a case where any highly accurate result is triggered, the said synthetic | combination probability will be 1/40 or less which is an upper limit reference | standard probability. This makes it possible to prevent the advantage from becoming excessively high.

  In the fifth high-winning result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is lower than in the case of the low-winning result, but the winning probability of the sorting determination process and the winning probability of the V winning lottery process are 100%. In this case, if a winning result is obtained in the winning / deciding process, the shift to the distribution execution mode is performed when a winning to the distributing through winning unit 35 occurs during the winning validity period of the distributing through winning unit 35. In addition to surely occurring, when the V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode, the shift to the opening / closing execution mode occurs surely. In this situation, as long as a winning result is obtained in the success / failure determination process, the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs with a high probability, so the player's attention to the winning result in the determination process is increased. It becomes possible.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations of the above embodiments. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be combined with each other, and the configurations of the following different modes may be applied individually or in combination to the combined configurations.

  (1) When winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls may be paid out. The predetermined number may be one or two or more. Further, when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls is executed regardless of whether the winning through period for the distributing through winning portion 35 is valid or not. Alternatively, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls may be executed only when a prize is awarded to the distribution through winning portion 35 during a period different from the winning validity period of the distributing through winning portion 35. Good. In these cases, a profit of paying out the game ball is given to the fact that the winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs in a period different from the winning validity period of the distributing through winning portion 35. . Further, instead of this configuration, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls may be executed only when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs during the winning validity period of the distributing through winning portion 35. Good. In this case, it is possible to increase the advantage of the winning validity period.

  (2) Instead of a configuration in which the allocation execution mode is surely generated when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs, an allocation is performed when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs. When the lottery process for determining whether or not to generate the minute execution mode is executed (for example, a winning winning is performed with a probability of 10%), and the winning selection is made in the lottery process, the sorting execution mode is set. It may be configured to occur. In this case, the winning valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 may be continued until the distribution execution mode is generated, and even if the distribution execution mode does not occur, the distribution through winning portion 35 is distributed to the distribution through winning portion 35. When the number of winning prizes reaches a specific number (for example, 10) or when the number of occurrences of the lottery process reaches a specific number of times (for example, 10), the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 ends. Also good.

  (3) In the first embodiment, instead of the configuration in which the variation display of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c is started when the winning validity period of the distribution through winning unit 35 is started, the distribution through As a configuration in which the variation display of the pattern on the distribution display unit 42c is started at the timing when the winning to the distribution through winning unit 35 occurs or the distribution execution mode is started in the winning period of the winning unit 35. Also good.

  (4) Instead of the configuration in which the V prize is not generated basically in the second allocation execution mode, the V allocation is less likely to occur in the second allocation execution mode than in the first allocation execution mode. A configuration in which a winning can occur may be adopted. For example, the release mode of the allocation winning device 36 is the same or substantially the same in the first allocation execution mode and the second allocation execution mode, and the period during which the switching piece 66 is arranged at the V guide position is the first allocation. The second distribution execution mode may have a shorter period than the minute execution mode. Further, for example, in the second distribution execution mode, the switching piece 66 is arranged at the V guide position after the distribution winning device 36 is closed, but immediately before the distribution winning device 36 is closed. Thus, a gaming ball that has won the distribution winning device 36 may be configured to reach the position of the switching piece 66 after being placed at the V guide position. In these cases, even in the second distribution execution mode, a V prize can be generated in a regular game, so that the player's attention to the second distribution execution mode can be increased.

  In this configuration, the same opening / closing execution mode may be generated when a V prize is generated in the first distribution execution mode and when a V prize is generated in the second distribution execution mode. Further, instead of this configuration, when the V winning is generated in the second distribution execution mode, the player enters the opening / closing execution mode which is more advantageous for the player than when the V winning is generated in the first distribution execution mode. It is good also as a structure. For example, the number of round games that can be awarded to the special electric prize winning device 37 is greater when the V prize is generated in the second allocation execution mode than when the V prize is generated in the first allocation execution mode. As a result, the number of occurrences of winning in the special electric prize winning device 37 during the opening / closing execution mode may be increased. In addition, for example, when the V prize is generated in the second allocation execution mode, the upper limit number of prizes to the special electricity prize winning device 37 in each round game is larger than when the V prize is generated in the first allocation execution mode. As a result, the number of game balls to be paid out during the opening / closing execution mode may be increased. In these cases, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction that the V winning has occurred in the second distribution execution mode in which the expected degree of occurrence of the V winning is relatively low.

  (5) When the V winning is generated in the second distribution execution mode in each of the above embodiments, the opening / closing execution mode may not be generated.

  (6) When a V winning is generated in the second distribution execution mode in each of the above embodiments, an external signal may be output from the pachinko machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall.

  (7) When a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in a situation that is not in the distribution execution mode, any one of the display light emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74, and the symbol display device 44 or a predetermined combination is abnormal. The notification may be executed. Further, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in a situation that is not in the distribution execution mode, an external signal may be output from the pachinko machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall.

  (8) In each of the above embodiments, the same opening / closing execution mode is generated when a V prize is generated in the first distribution execution mode and when a V prize is generated in the second distribution execution mode. It is good. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the opening / closing execution mode.

  (9) The third distribution execution mode may be set in addition to the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode in the above embodiments. For example, while the opening manner of the distribution winning device 36 is the same or substantially the same in the first distribution execution mode and the third distribution execution mode, the period during which the switching piece 66 is arranged at the V guide position is the first distribution time. The third distribution execution mode may have a shorter period than the minute execution mode. Further, for example, in the third distribution execution mode, the switching piece 66 is arranged at the V guide position after the distribution winning device 36 is closed, but immediately before the distribution winning device 36 is closed. Thus, a gaming ball that has won the distribution winning device 36 may be configured to reach the position of the switching piece 66 after being placed at the V guide position.

  (10) The configuration of the distribution winning device 36 is not limited to the configuration in each of the above-described embodiments. For example, a rolling portion in which a rolling area of game balls is formed is provided in the distribution winning device 36. In addition, a plurality of game ball drop holes are provided in the rolling part, and the game ball that has won the distribution winning device 36 rolls in one of the drop holes after rolling in the rolling region. Also good. And when a game ball falls in the fall hole corresponding to V winning, it is good also as a structure which transfers to opening-and-closing execution mode as generation | occurrence | production of V winning. In this case, in the first distribution execution mode, the game balls are led out to the rolling area so that the game balls can fall into the drop holes corresponding to the V winnings. In the second distribution execution mode, May be configured such that the game ball is led out to the rolling area so that the game ball does not fall into the drop hole corresponding to the V prize.

  (11) The special prize winning device 37 may not be provided, and each round game may be performed by opening the distribution winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode.

  (12) Instead of the configuration in which the opening / closing execution mode is generated as a privilege when the V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode, the winning / raising lottery mode after the distribution execution mode may be the high probability mode. The support mode after the execution mode may be a high-frequency support mode, or a structure in which a large amount of game balls are paid out may be used.

  (13) On-hold information (hereinafter referred to as first on-hold information) acquired when a winning to the first operating part 32 occurs and on-hold information acquired when a winning to the second operating part 33 occurs ( Hereinafter, the second hold information) may be stored separately. In this case, it is good also as a structure from which the player's advantage differs at the time of a success / failure determination process being performed by the first hold information and the second hold information. For example, the configuration in which the game determination process is executed for the second hold information may be more advantageous to the player than the game determination process is executed for the first hold information. Specifically, the case where the success / failure determination process is executed for the second hold information and the hit result is more than the case where the hit / failure determination process is executed for the first hold information and the hit result is obtained. Alternatively, the probability that the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process may be high.

  Further, in the configuration in which the first hold information and the second hold information are distinguished and stored as described above, the determination of success / failure is made in the order obtained regardless of whether the first hold information or the second hold information. The configuration may be a process execution target, and the second hold information may be a priority determination process execution target over the first hold information regardless of the order of acquisition.

  (14) In the second distribution execution mode, the switching piece 66 may not be arranged at the V guide position, so that a V prize is not generated reliably.

  (15) In each of the above embodiments, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the occurrence of the V prize in the first distribution execution mode is triggered by the occurrence of the V prize in the second allocation execution mode. As a result, the number of round games that can be awarded to the special prize winning device 37 is larger than the open / close execution mode, and as a result, the number of occurrences of winnings to the special prize winning device 37 during the opening / closing execution mode increases. It is good also as a structure. In addition, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the occurrence of the V winning in the first distribution execution mode is greater than the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the occurrence of the V winning in the second allocation execution mode. In addition, the number of payouts of game balls in the open / close execution mode may be increased as a result of increasing the upper limit number of winnings to the special electricity winning device 37 in each round game.

  (16) When the result of the success / failure determination process is a winning result, the prize winning valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 does not occur, but the distribution execution mode occurs, and in the distribution execution mode V A configuration may be adopted in which an open / close execution mode occurs when a winning occurs. In this case, in the distribution execution mode, the game balls that have won the distribution winning device 36 may be configured to generate a V winning with a predetermined probability that is greater than 0% and less than 100%. In addition, instead of the configuration in which the distribution execution mode is generated when the result of the determination process is a hit result, when the game ball enters the first entrance, the entrance to the second entrance And a distribution execution mode is generated when a game ball enters the second pitching section, and an open / close execution mode is generated when a V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode. .

  (17) In the distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 of the second operating unit 33 may not be in the driving state. In the second distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 may be in the driving state. The guidance unit 52 may not be in the driving state in the distribution execution mode. The guidance unit 52 may be in the driving state in the first distribution execution mode, whereas the guidance unit 52 is in the second distribution execution mode. It is good also as a structure which is not in a drive state. In addition, in the opening / closing execution mode, the guidance unit 52 of the second operating unit 33 may not be in the drive state, and in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 can be in the drive state. On the other hand, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 may not be driven. In the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 The guidance unit 52 may not be in the driving state in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode, although it may be in the driving state.

  (18) The distribution through winning portion 35 may be provided below the second operating portion 33. In this case, the guiding unit 52 of the second operating unit 33 is not driven during the winning effective period of the distribution through winning unit 35, and the second operating unit 33 is guided during a period different from the winning effective period. The unit 52 may be in a driving state.

  (19) Even if the result of the hit determination process and the distribution determination process is a highly accurate result, if the open / close execution mode does not occur, the pass / fail lottery mode after the end of the distribution execution mode is set to the low probability mode. It is good also as a structure to be made. In this case, the support mode may be configured to be set to the low frequency support mode, or may be configured to be set to the high frequency support mode that continues until the next hit result occurs. It is good also as a structure set to the high frequency support mode which continues until a game time is digested.

  In addition, even if the results of the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process result in a low probability, if the opening / closing execution mode does not occur, the support mode after the end of the distribution execution mode is set to the low frequency support mode. It is good also as a structure to be.

  (20) When the distribution execution mode is entered, a configuration in which the detection of the game ball in the V winning detection sensor 69 is surely generated regardless of the type thereof may be adopted. For example, the passage through which the game balls won in the distribution prize winning device 36 pass is not branched at the discharge passage area 65b and the V prize passage area 65c but is provided with only the V prize passage area 65c. A game ball that has won a prize in the device 36 may pass through the V winning path area 65c and be reliably detected by the V winning detection sensor 69. Further, instead of this configuration, the path through which the game balls won in the distribution prize winning device 36 are branched into the discharge path area 65b and the V prize path area 65c, as in the above-described embodiments. Even in the distribution execution mode, the switching piece 66 is used so that at least one of the game balls won in the distribution winning device 36 passes through the V winning path area 65c and is reliably detected by the V winning detection sensor 69. The drive control may be performed.

  (21) The V winning detection sensor 69 is replaced with a configuration in which the open / close execution mode is surely generated when the V winning detection sensor 69 detects a game ball won in the distribution winning device 36 in the distribution executing mode. The opening / closing execution mode may be generated with a predetermined probability (probability greater than 0% and less than 100%) when a game ball is detected at. For example, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, a lottery process is executed by the main MPU 92, and an opening / closing execution mode may be generated when a winning selection is made in the lottery process. . As a result, the player expects not only that a V prize will be generated but also that the player will win a prize in the lottery process.

  (22) Display control based on a command output from the main control device 81 instead of a configuration in which the display control device 111 is controlled by the sound emission control device 101 based on a command output from the main control device 81 The device 111 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 101. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 101 and the display control device 111 are separately provided, the two control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the two control devices has a function. May be integrated into the main control device 81, and both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 81. The configuration of commands output from the main control device 81 to the sound emission control device 101 and the configuration of commands output from the sound emission control device 101 to the display control device 111 are also arbitrary.

  (23) The device for performing the effect for the game times is not limited to the symbol display device 44, and the effect for the effect for the game times is executed by operating the decorative member provided in a movable manner. It is also possible to have a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by a combination of all or a part of the above aspects. Good.

  (24) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right when it enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which game balls are circulated and used without being discharged to an island facility. In addition, it is impossible for a player to replenish game balls to a pachinko machine, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is managed as data, and the launch operation is performed in a situation where the number of available game balls is one or more. The present invention may be applied to a configuration in which when a game ball is fired, the number of usable game balls is subtracted. In this case, when a winning ball is generated by winning through the distribution through winning unit 35, the distribution winning device 36, or the special electricity winning device 37, the number of usable game balls increases in the data. It becomes.

  (25) In each of the above embodiments, only the first distribution execution mode may exist as the distribution execution mode. In this case, when the allocation execution mode occurs, the V winning is generated by continuing to fire the game ball aiming for the winning to the distribution winning device 36. When this configuration is applied to the fourth to eighth embodiments, the first distribution execution mode is surely generated when the shift to the distribution execution mode is won in the distribution determination process.

  (26) In the fourth to eighth embodiments, when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs during the winning validity period to the distributing through winning portion 35, the distribution execution mode is entered. Although the transition occurs surely, the distribution probability between the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, in the case of the fourth embodiment and the eighth embodiment, when any of the first to fifth high-accuracy results is obtained, the first distribution is performed as compared with the case where the low-accuracy results are obtained. The distribution probability to the execution mode may be increased, and the distribution probability to the first distribution execution mode may be different in each of the first to fifth high-accuracy results. Further, for example, in the fifth embodiment to the seventh embodiment, in the probability determination lottery process of the distribution determination, the distribution probability to the first distribution execution mode is changed, and the success / failure determination process is performed. As a configuration, at least one probability is corrected so that a combined probability obtained by integrating the probability that the winning result is selected and the probability that the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process is equal to or less than a predetermined value. Also good.

  (27) In the case where the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode is changed in the distribution determination process triggered by the high probability result in the fourth to seventh embodiments, It is good also as a structure changed into the probability higher than the said probability set as a trigger that it became a low probability hit result. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of having a highly accurate result.

  (28) When the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process is changed in response to the high probability result in the fourth embodiment to the seventh embodiment, the low probability result It is good also as a structure which can be changed into the probability lower than the said probability set as the opportunity. However, in this case, in order to ensure the advantage of having a high-accuracy hit result, the probability that the hit result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the shift to the distribution execution mode in the assignment determination process Transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process so that the combined probability of each probability is higher than the combined probability of each probability set when the combined probability obtained by integrating It is preferable that the probability of winning is set.

  (29) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process are determined. At least one of the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is corrected so that the integrated composite probability is equal to or less than a predetermined value. Although it is configured, in addition to or instead of this, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process so that the above-described composite probability is equal to or higher than the specific value and the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process It is good also as a structure by which at least one is corrected among the probability of winning. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the synthesis probability from becoming lower than expected.

  (30) In the fifth embodiment to the seventh embodiment, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability that the transition determination mode is won in the distribution determination process are high. In the case where a higher probability than the low probability is set when triggered by the hit result, the probability may be corrected so that the combined probability obtained by integrating the probabilities always becomes a predetermined probability. For example, in the case of the fifth embodiment, in the distribution determination probability correction process (step S2307), the distribution determination process has a probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode so that the synthesis probability becomes a predetermined probability. Will be corrected.

  Further, for example, in the case of the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability that the distribution determination mode is won in the distribution determination process. A situation can occur in which one is set to a probability at the time of a low probability and the other is set to a probability triggered by a high probability result. In such a case, while keeping one probability set as the probability at the low probability as it is, the other probability is set so that the synthesis probability becomes a predetermined probability. As a result, when a high-accuracy result is generated for at least one of the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process, the above-described combination probability is surely a predetermined probability.

  In addition, for example, in the case of the seventh embodiment, one of the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability that the distribution determination mode is won in the distribution determination process is first. While the number of continuations becomes “0” and is set to a probability at the time of low probability, a situation may occur where the number of continuations is one or more and the probability at the time of high probability is maintained. In such a case, at the timing when one of the continuation times is “0” and set to a low probability, the probability of the side having the continuation number of 1 or more is higher than before so that the composite probability becomes a predetermined probability. Will be changed to a high probability. Thereby, the change opportunity of a probability is diversified.

  (31) In the fourth embodiment to the eighth embodiment, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process may be notified as it is, and the selection probability of the notification mode according to the probability. May be configured such that the probability is not notified at all, or may be configured to perform notification indicating whether the probability is equal to or higher than a predetermined probability.

  (32) In the fourth embodiment to the eighth embodiment described above, the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode may be notified as it is in the distribution determination process, and according to the probability. It is good also as a structure from which the selection probability of an alerting | reporting aspect differs, the structure which the said probability is not alert | reported at all, and the alerting | reporting which shows whether it is more than a predetermined probability are good.

  (33) In the eighth embodiment, the probability that the V winning prize is won in the V winning lottery process may be notified as it is, and the selection probability of the notification mode is different depending on the probability. Alternatively, a configuration in which the probability is not notified at all may be used, or a configuration in which notification indicating whether the probability is equal to or higher than a predetermined probability may be executed.

  (34) In the fourth embodiment, the game state transition process (FIG. 37) is not executed unless the opening / closing execution mode that has been transitioned due to the occurrence of the V winning is completed. Even if no occurrence occurs, the game state transition process (FIG. 37) may be executed when the transition to the distribution execution mode occurs, and the transition to the distribution execution mode does not occur. The game state transition process (FIG. 37) may be executed when the game round that is the winning result in the determination process is completed. As a result, it is possible to generate many chances that the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability that the winning in the distribution determination process is a win in the distribution execution mode will fluctuate.

  (35) In the fifth embodiment, in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 39), the probability determination lottery process for the distribution determination may be executed prior to the probability determination lottery process for the success / failure determination. In this case, if the combined probability obtained by integrating the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition execution mode in the distribution determination process is greater than a predetermined value, the determination is correct / failed. The probability that the winning result is selected in the process is corrected.

  (36) Embodiments other than the seventh embodiment in which the situation in which a higher probability than the low probability is set or a situation where the probability can be set continues for the number of continuations as in the seventh embodiment You may apply to.

  (37) In the seventh embodiment, when the probability is set and the number of continuations is set in response to the high probability result, the set probability has the value of the number of continuations of “0”. It is good also as a structure hold | maintained until it becomes. This makes it easier for the player to understand the probability setting status.

  (38) In the eighth embodiment, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process may not be changed. In this case, the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process and the probability of winning the V prize in the V winning lottery process vary. To the configuration, a configuration in which the probability correction process is executed so that the composite probability is equal to or less than a predetermined value as in the fifth embodiment may be applied, as in the sixth embodiment. A configuration in which the triggers for changing each probability may be applied, and a configuration in which a situation in which the probability becomes higher or higher than in the low probability as in the seventh embodiment continues for a continuous number of times. You may apply.

  (39) In the eighth embodiment described above, the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process may not be changed. In this case, the probability that the winning result is selected in the winner determination process and the probability of winning the V prize in the V prize lottery process vary. To the configuration, a configuration in which the probability correction process is executed so that the composite probability is equal to or less than a predetermined value as in the fifth embodiment may be applied, as in the sixth embodiment. A configuration in which the triggers for changing each probability may be applied, and a configuration in which a situation in which the probability becomes higher or higher than in the low probability as in the seventh embodiment continues for a continuous number of times. You may apply.

  (40) For a configuration in which the opening / closing execution mode is surely generated when the game times that have been won in the success / failure determination process are finished, the probability of being a winning result in the failure / inhibition determination process is higher than when the probability is low. A configuration may be applied in which the situation continues until a predetermined number of opening / closing execution modes occurs and there are a plurality of types of the predetermined number of times. In this case, the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first operating unit 32 and the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second operating unit 33 are stored separately, and which is the holding information? The selection rate of the predetermined number of times, the number of types of the predetermined number of times, and the selection expected value of the predetermined number of times may be different. As a result, the predetermined number of selection modes can be made different depending on the type of the operating units 32 and 33 that triggered the acquisition of the hold information, thereby diversifying the game.

  (41) There are three or more types of probable outcomes in the success / failure determination process for the configuration in which the open / close execution mode is surely generated when the game times that are the outcome of the success / failure determination process are completed. A configuration may be applied.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses and the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses and the like.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Variable pitching means (distribution winning device 36) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state (function for executing the distribution start process and the distribution process in the main MPU 92); ,
A state setting means (a function for executing a distribution standby process in the main MPU 92) for setting the variable entry control to a state (allocation execution mode);
A privilege (transition to the opening / closing execution mode) is granted to the player based on the occurrence of a privilege grant opportunity (detection of a game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69) by the game ball that has entered the variable pitching means. Privilege granting means (function of executing the process of step S1311 in the main MPU 92);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, even when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a bonus is not given to the player unless a bonus grant opportunity is generated by the game ball. As a result, when the variable entry control of the variable entry means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable entry means, but also the game that entered the variable entry means. It is expected that a privilege grant opportunity will be generated by the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation becomes stepwise, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A2. Variable pitching means (distribution winning device 36) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state (function for executing the distribution start process and the distribution process in the main MPU 92); ,
A privilege (transition to the opening / closing execution mode) is granted to the player based on the occurrence of a privilege grant opportunity (detection of a game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69) by the game ball that has entered the variable pitching means. Privilege granting means (function of executing the process of step S1311 in the main MPU 92);
Predetermined lottery means for executing predetermined lottery processing based on the occurrence of a predetermined lottery opportunity (winning of the distribution through winning portion 35) (in the first embodiment, the processing of steps S1003 and S1004 in the main MPU 92 is executed) A function to execute the processing of step S1802 and step S1803 in the main MPU 92 in the third embodiment),
First state setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1104 and S1105 in the main MPU 92) for setting the variable entrance control to be executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a specific result;
Second state setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1106 and S1107 in the main MPU 92) for setting the variable entry control when the predetermined lottery process result is a non-specific result; ,
With
When the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the specific result, the privilege grant opportunity may occur, or when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the specific result, the result of the predetermined lottery process is The gaming machine is characterized in that the privilege grant opportunity is more likely to occur than when a non-specific result is obtained.

  According to the feature A2, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a bonus is not given to the player unless a bonus grant opportunity is generated by the game ball. As a result, when the variable entry control of the variable entry means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable entry means, but also the game that entered the variable entry means. It is expected that a privilege grant opportunity will be generated by the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation becomes stepwise, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, when the result of the predetermined lottery process executed based on the occurrence of the predetermined lottery is a specific result, a privilege granting opportunity is more likely to occur than when a non-specific result is obtained. As a result, the player not only expects the variable entry control of the variable entry means to be executed, but also expects the result of the predetermined lottery process to be a specific result. Therefore, the number of objects that the player expects can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, not only when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a specific result, but also when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a non-specific result, the variable pitching control of the variable pitching means is executed. Thereby, when a predetermined lottery opportunity occurs, the variable pitching control of the variable pitching means is executed regardless of the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to give many opportunities to execute the variable pitching control of the variable pitching means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature A3. Based on the occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity, as the granting of the privilege, the variable pitching means or the variable pitching means (special prize winning device 37) different from the variable pitching means is subsequently opened. A gaming machine according to A2.

  According to the feature A3, when a privilege grant opportunity occurs, the variable entrance means or a different variable entrance means different from the variable entrance control of the variable entrance means for the occurrence of the predetermined lottery opportunity is opened. It becomes a state. Thereby, it becomes possible to extend the situation where the variable pitching means is opened by generating a privilege grant opportunity.

  Feature A4. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, a means (a payout device 86, a payout control device 87) that gives a player a grant target that is either a game ball or usable game ball number information. A gaming machine according to the feature A2 or A3, characterized in that

  According to the feature A4, since the number of game balls that can be used by the player increases due to the occurrence of game balls entering the variable ball entry means, variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is executed. It becomes possible to raise the attention degree to. When the predetermined lottery trigger is generated, the variable pitching control of the variable pitching means is executed even if the predetermined lottery process result is a non-specific result when the predetermined lottery trigger occurs. Even if the result becomes a non-specific result, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game from being extremely lowered.

Feature A5. In a state where the variable pitch control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specific result, the total period of the open state in the variable pitch means is variable in relation to the game ball launch cycle. It is set to a period that allows a specific number of game balls to enter the ball entry means,
In the state where the variable pitch control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the non-specific result, the total period of the open state in the variable pitch means is related to the game ball launch cycle. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A4, wherein the gaming machine is set to a period during which the specific number of gaming balls can be entered into the variable pitching means.

  According to the feature A5, even if the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a non-specific result, it is equivalent to the case where the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the specific result in the state where the variable pitching control of the variable pitching means is executed. The number of game balls can be made to enter the variable entry means. Thereby, it becomes possible to reduce a player's disadvantageous feeling that the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result.

  Feature A6. The state where the variable pitch control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specific result, and the variable pitch control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the non-specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5, wherein an expected number of game balls entering the variable entry means is different depending on a state.

  According to the feature A6, the result of the predetermined lottery process is a specific result in relation to the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in a state where the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is executed. It is possible to make a difference in the advantage between the case and the case where the non-specific result is obtained.

  Feature A7. The game according to any one of features A2 to A6, wherein the bonus granting unit does not grant the bonus when the bonus granting opportunity occurs even though the predetermined lottery process is not executed. Machine.

  When a privilege grant opportunity occurs despite the fact that the predetermined lottery process has not been executed, there is a high possibility that the privilege grant opportunity has been caused by an illegal act. Under such circumstances, according to the feature A7, when a privilege grant opportunity occurs despite the fact that the predetermined lottery process has not been executed, no privilege is granted, and thus no privilege is granted for such fraudulent acts. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature A8. The predetermined lottery opportunity is generated based on a game ball entering a predetermined pitching portion (the distribution through winning portion 35),
The predetermined lottery process is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined entrance part during a predetermined effective period, and even if the game ball enters the predetermined entrance part during a period different from the predetermined effective period, The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A7, wherein the predetermined lottery process is not executed.

  According to the feature A8, since a predetermined lottery opportunity is generated based on a game ball having entered the predetermined entrance part, in order to generate a privilege grant opportunity, first, the game ball is inserted into the predetermined entrance part. After that, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means. As a result, the target for entering the game ball changes in stages, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, a predetermined lottery process is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering part during the predetermined effective period, and even if a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering part during a period different from the predetermined effective period The lottery process is not executed. As a result, it is possible to limit the situation in which the entry of the game ball into the predetermined pitching part triggers the execution of the predetermined lottery process, and the execution frequency of the predetermined lottery process can be set to an appropriate frequency.

  Feature A9. When the privilege granting opportunity occurs in the state where the variable pitch control is executed in response to the result of the predetermined lottery process being the non-specific result, and the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specific result Means for executing different notifications as notifications of occurrence of the privilege granting trigger when the privilege granting trigger occurs in the state where the variable pitching control triggered by the occurrence is performed ( The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A8, further including a function of executing processing of steps S1302 and S1306 in the main side MPU 92 and a display side MPU 113).

  According to the feature A9, whether or not a privilege grant opportunity has occurred in a state in which the variable pitch control is executed in response to the result of the predetermined lottery process becoming a non-specific result, or the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specific result It becomes possible to clearly grasp whether or not a privilege granting opportunity has occurred in a state where the variable pitching control is being executed in response to the event.

  Feature A10. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A9, further comprising result notifying means (distribution display unit 42c) for notifying information corresponding to a result of the predetermined lottery process.

  According to the feature A10, it is possible to notify the contents of the specific period determined by the predetermined lottery process.

Feature A11. A first control means (main MPU 92) having the privilege granting means, the predetermined lottery means, the first state setting means and the second state setting means;
Second control means (sound light side MPU 103, display side MPU 113) for executing processing for controlling the execution of the effect in the specific effect means based on the information transmitted by the first control means,
With
The gaming machine according to Feature A10, wherein the result notification unit is controlled by the first control unit.

  According to the feature A11, the reliability of the information displayed on the result notification unit can be increased.

Feature A12. When a specific lottery opportunity (winning to the first operating part 32 or the second operating part 33) occurs, a predetermined effective period (a winning effective period of the distribution through winning part 35) that can generate the predetermined lottery opportunity Specific lottery means for executing a specific lottery process for determining whether or not to generate the function (a function for executing the processes of steps S301 and S403 in the main MPU 92);
Specific operation control means for controlling the specific operation means (special drawing display unit 42a) so as to have the operation content corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process when the specific unit operation is started and the specific unit operation is ended. The gaming machine according to Feature A10 or A11, further including a function of executing the processing of Step S412, Step S803, and Step S804 in the main MPU 92.

  According to the feature A12, the means for notifying that the specific lottery process has been executed and the lottery result of the specific lottery process and the means for notifying the result of the predetermined lottery process are the specific operation means and the result notifying means. Are provided individually. Accordingly, it is possible to monitor each content individually by checking the specific operation means and the result notification means.

  Feature A13. When the specific lottery process is executed, the specific unit effect is started, and when the predetermined effective period is subsequently executed, the specific effect means (symbol) so that the specific unit effect is continued in the predetermined effective period. The gaming machine according to Feature A12, comprising means (display-side MPU 113) for controlling the display device 44).

  According to the feature A13, by performing a series of effects including the predetermined effective period before the start of the predetermined effective period and the predetermined effective period by the specific effect means, it is possible to enhance the effect in the period. Further, in such a configuration in which a series of effects including a predetermined effective period is executed before the start of the predetermined effective period by the specific effect unit, each content is monitored by confirming the specific operation unit and the result notifying unit. It can be done individually.

  Feature A14. Any of the features A10 to A13, wherein the notification of the information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process in the result notification means is started when the state in which the variable pitch control is executed is started. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature A14, the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process can be notified at the start of the state in which the variable pitch control is executed.

  Feature A15. The game according to any one of features A10 to A14, wherein the notification of information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process in the result notification means is continued in a state in which the variable pitch control is executed. Machine.

  According to the feature A15, it is possible to grasp the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process by confirming the result notifying unit at an arbitrary timing in a state where the variable pitch control is executed.

Feature A16. When a specific lottery opportunity (winning to the first operating part 32 or the second operating part 33) occurs, a predetermined effective period (a winning effective period of the distribution through winning part 35) that can generate the predetermined lottery opportunity Specific lottery means for executing a specific lottery process for determining whether or not to generate the function (a function for executing the processes of steps S301 and S403 in the main MPU 92);
A unit effect control means (display side) that starts a specific unit effect in the specific effect means (symbol display device 44) and sets the execution mode of the specific unit effect to a mode corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. MPU113),
With
The execution mode of the specific unit effect is an execution mode corresponding to the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery process is a winning result, and the predetermined effective period occurs in a situation where the specific unit effect is continued. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A15.

  According to the feature A16, it is possible to provide an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process by executing the specific unit effect that is an execution mode corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process. In this case, the specific unit effect is continued in the predetermined effective period even after the execution mode becomes an execution mode corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process being the winning result. Accordingly, it is possible to notify the player that the predetermined effective period is in use using the specific unit effect that has been executed before the predetermined effective period is started.

  Feature A17. The game machine according to Feature A16, wherein the unit effect control means continues the specific unit effect even in a state where the variable pitch control is executed.

  According to the feature A17, the specific unit effect including the state in which the variable entry control is executed is executed, so that the period before the predetermined effective period is started, the predetermined effective period, and the variable entry control are executed. It becomes possible to provide a series of specific unit effects by using the period.

  Feature A18. The game machine according to Feature A17, wherein, when the privilege grant opportunity occurs, the unit effect control means sets the execution mode of the specific unit effect as a mode corresponding to the occurrence of the privilege grant trigger.

  According to the feature A18, when a privilege grant opportunity occurs in a state where the variable pitch control is executed, the execution mode of the specific unit effect becomes a mode corresponding to the occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity, whereby the specific unit effect is It becomes possible to notify the occurrence of a privilege granting opportunity.

  Feature A19. The unit effect control means, as the specific unit effect, to display a variation display of a pattern in a plurality of variable display areas, and when the predetermined period has passed when the lottery result of the specific lottery process is a winning result, In the situation where the same type of pattern is stopped and displayed in a part of the plurality of variable display areas and a combination of reach patterns is formed, the variable display of the pattern is continued in the remaining variable display area, The game according to Feature A18, wherein when a privilege grant opportunity occurs, the same type of design as the design forming the reach design combination is stopped and displayed in the remaining variable display area. Machine.

  According to the feature A19, it is possible to execute a series of effects using the variable display of the pattern in the period before the predetermined effective period is started, the predetermined effective period, and the period during which the variable pitch control is performed. . In addition, reach variation display is started when the predetermined effective period starts, and when a privilege grant opportunity occurs, the combination of the same type of pattern is stopped and displayed, so that each situation is displayed as a variation display of the pattern It is possible to make notification using this aspect.

Feature A20. Specific operation control means for controlling the specific operation means (special drawing display unit 42a) so as to have the operation content corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process when the specific unit operation is started and the specific unit operation is ended. The function of executing the processing of step S412, step S803 and step S804 in the main MPU 92);
When starting the predetermined unit motion and ending the predetermined unit motion, the predetermined motion means (vibration) is selected so that the content of the motion corresponds to the presence / absence of the privilege granting trigger when the variable pitch control is executed. Predetermined operation control means for controlling the minute display unit 42c) (function of executing the processing of step S905, step S1001, step S1101, step S1201, step S1302, and step S1306 in the main MPU 92);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A16 to A19, comprising:

  According to the feature A20, the operation means for notifying that the specific lottery process has been executed and the lottery result of the specific lottery process, the state in which the variable pitch control is executed, and whether or not a privilege grant opportunity has occurred Is provided separately as the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means. Thus, in a configuration in which a series of effects including the predetermined effective period is executed by the specific effect unit before the start of the predetermined effective period, the specific operation unit and the predetermined operation unit are confirmed to monitor each period individually. Can be done.

  Feature A21. The gaming machine according to Feature A20, wherein the predetermined operation control means starts the predetermined unit operation when the predetermined effective period is started.

  According to the feature A21, it is possible for the manager of the game hall to clearly grasp whether or not the predetermined effective period has been started by checking whether or not the predetermined unit operation has been started in the predetermined operation means. .

  Feature A22. The gaming machine according to Feature A21, wherein the specific action control means ends the specific unit action before the predetermined effective period is started.

  According to the feature A22, the result of the specific lottery process is notified in the specific operation means before the predetermined effective period is started. Thereby, the administrator of the game hall can confirm whether or not the predetermined effective period generated thereafter is normal by confirming the specific operation means.

Feature A23. First control means (main-side MPU 92) having the predetermined lottery means, the specific lottery means, and the privilege granting means;
Second control means (sound light side MPU 103, display side MPU 113) for executing processing for controlling the specific effect means based on information transmitted by the first control means;
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features A20 to A22, wherein the first control means includes the specific action control means and the predetermined action control means.

  According to the feature A23, since the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means are directly controlled by the first control means, it is possible to improve the reliability of the contents in the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means. On the other hand, since the specific effect means is controlled by the second control means, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the first control means.

  Feature A24. The privilege granting means includes a case where the privilege grant trigger occurs in a state where the variable pitch control is executed in response to the result of the predetermined lottery process becoming the non-specific result, and the predetermined lottery process The features A2 to A2 are characterized in that the privilege granting mode is different from the case where the privilege granting trigger is generated in a state in which the variable pitch control is executed when the result becomes the specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of A23.

  According to the feature A24, since a privilege granting mode when a privilege grant opportunity occurs is different between a case where the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result and a case where the result is a specific result, the predetermined lottery is different. Even if the result of the processing becomes a non-specific result, the variable pitching control of the variable pitching means is executed, and when a bonus granting opportunity occurs in a state where the variable pitching control is executed, the bonus is given. A difference corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process in the configuration to be given can be generated with respect to the content of the privilege.

Feature A25. Based on the occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity, as the grant of the privilege, the variable game means or a variable game means different from it is then configured to generate a specific game state,
The privilege granting means includes a case where the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the non-specific result and the privilege grant opportunity occurs, and a case where the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the specific result and the privilege grant opportunity occurs, The gaming machine according to Feature A24, wherein a minimum time required for the end of the specific gaming state is made different.

  According to the feature A25, the specific gaming state ends when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a non-specific result and a bonus granting opportunity occurs and when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the specific result and a bonus granting trigger occurs. Since the minimum time required for the game is different, it is possible to clearly distinguish both in the appearance of the operation content of the game.

Feature A26. When a game ball enters the variable ball entry means that is in the open state in the specific game state, a means (payout) that gives the player a grant target that is either a game ball or usable game ball number information Device 86, a payout control device 87),
The bonus granting means generates the bonus grant opportunity when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the non-specific result and the bonus game is triggered and the specific gaming state is generated and the result of the lottery process is the specific result. Compared with the case where the launch operation is performed in the same manner in the specific game state, the number of grants of the grant target expected in the specific game state is comparable. The gaming machine according to Feature A25, wherein there is a game machine.

  According to the feature A26, when a specific gaming state occurs, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage according to the result of the predetermined lottery process from occurring with respect to the number of objects to be granted in the specific gaming state.

  Feature A27. The privilege granting means is configured such that the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the non-specific result, and the specific gaming state due to the occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity causes the result of the predetermined lottery process to become the specific result and the privilege grant opportunity. The gaming machine according to Feature A26, characterized in that a minimum time required for completion is made longer than the specific gaming state due to the occurrence of the game.

  According to feature A27, when a privilege grant opportunity occurs even though the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result, the minimum time required for the specific gaming state to end is increased. It becomes easy for the administrator of the game hall to confirm whether or not the occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity is regular.

  Feature A28. The privilege granting means is configured such that the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the non-specific result, and the specific gaming state due to the occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity causes the result of the predetermined lottery process to become the specific result and the privilege grant opportunity. The gaming machine according to Feature A27, characterized in that the period during which the variable pitching means to be opened in the specific gaming state is maintained in the closed state is made longer than the specific gaming state due to the occurrence of the game.

  According to feature A28, the minimum time required for the completion of the specific game state is lengthened while the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means to be released in the specific game state is not affected. It becomes possible.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A28, any one of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F3, and the features G1 Multiple configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. When a specific lottery opportunity (winning to the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33) occurs, a specific period (allocation execution mode) or a period during which the specific period can be started (for allocation) A specific lottery means (a function for executing the processes of step S301 and step S403 in the main MPU 92) for executing a specific lottery process for determining whether or not to generate a winning valid period of the through winning unit 35);
A predetermined lottery that executes a predetermined lottery process when a predetermined lottery opportunity (winning to the distribution through winning portion 35) occurs based on a player's game operation after the lottery result of the specific lottery process becomes a winning result Means (function to execute the processing of step S1003 and step S1004 in the main MPU 92 in the first embodiment, function to execute the processing of step S1802 and step S1803 in the main MPU 92 in the third embodiment),
A specific period setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1104 to S1107 in the main MPU 92) to perform the specific period corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, when the lottery result of the specific lottery process becomes the winning result, the specific period corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process is not performed, but the lottery result of the specific lottery process becomes the winning result. After that, a specific period corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process executed when the predetermined lottery trigger is generated based on the player's game operation is performed. Thus, in a situation where it is determined that a specific period will occur, the player performs a game operation while expecting the contents of the specific period to be advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature B2. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the predetermined lottery opportunity is generated based on a game ball having entered a predetermined pitching portion (the distribution through winning portion 35).

  According to the feature B2, since a predetermined lottery opportunity is generated based on the game ball entering the predetermined pitching part, in the configuration in which the predetermined lottery trigger is generated based on the player's game operation, It is possible to make the generation condition clear.

Feature B3. A predetermined effective period (a winning effective period to the distribution through winning portion 35) occurs after the lottery result of the specific lottery process becomes the winning result,
The predetermined lottery process is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined entrance part during a predetermined effective period, and even if the game ball enters the predetermined entrance part during a period different from the predetermined effective period, The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein the predetermined lottery process is not executed.

  According to the feature B3, it is possible to limit the situation in which the entry of the game ball to the predetermined pitching part triggers the execution of the predetermined lottery process, even though the result of the specific lottery process is not the winning result. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined lottery process from being executed.

  Feature B4. When a game ball enters the predetermined ball-entry unit, the grant is either a game ball or usable game ball number information regardless of the predetermined effective period or a period different from the predetermined effective period The gaming machine according to Feature B3, further comprising means (payout device 86, payout control device 87) for giving a target to a player.

  According to the feature B4, when a game ball enters the predetermined entrance part, the game mode is given to the player even during a period different from the predetermined effective period. It becomes possible to give a profit to the player for the occurrence of the ball.

  Feature B5. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the specific period setting unit starts the specific period when the predetermined lottery process is executed.

  According to the feature B5, the predetermined lottery opportunity can be set not only as an execution trigger for the predetermined lottery process but also as a start trigger for the specific period. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the understanding of the game content as compared to a configuration in which each opportunity is different.

  Feature B6. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, further comprising result notifying means (distribution display unit 42c) for notifying information corresponding to a result of the predetermined lottery process.

  According to the feature B6, it is possible to notify the contents of the specific period determined by the predetermined lottery process.

Feature B7. First control means (main-side MPU 92) having the specific lottery means, the predetermined lottery means, and the specific period setting means;
Second control means (sound light side MPU 103, display side MPU 113) for executing processing for controlling execution of the effect in the specific effect means based on the information transmitted by the first control means;
With
The gaming machine according to Feature B6, wherein the result notification unit is controlled by the first control unit.

  According to the feature B7, the reliability of the information displayed on the result notification unit can be increased.

  Feature B8. Specific operation control means for controlling the specific operation means (special drawing display unit 42a) so as to have the operation content corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process when the specific unit operation is started and the specific unit operation is ended. The gaming machine according to Feature B6 or B7, further including a function of executing the processing of Step S412, Step S803, and Step S804 in the main MPU 92.

  According to the feature B8, the means for notifying that the specific lottery process has been executed and the lottery result of the specific lottery process and the means for notifying the result of the predetermined lottery process are the specific operation means and the result notifying means. Are provided individually. Accordingly, it is possible to monitor each content individually by checking the specific operation means and the result notification means.

  Feature B9. When the specific lottery process is executed, the specific unit effect is started, and when the specific period is subsequently executed, the specific effect means (symbol display device) so that the specific unit effect is continued in the specific period. 44) The gaming machine according to Feature B8, further comprising means for controlling (display-side MPU 113).

  According to the feature B9, it is possible to enhance the production effect in these periods by executing a series of productions including the specific period before the start of the specific period and the specific period. Further, in the configuration in which a series of effects is executed including the specific period before the start of the specific period and the specific effect means in this way, each content is individually monitored by confirming the specific operation means and the result notifying means. Can be done.

  Feature B10. The gaming machine according to any one of features B6 to B9, wherein notification of information corresponding to a result of the predetermined lottery process in the result notification unit is started when the specific period is started.

  According to the feature B10, the content of the specific period determined by the predetermined lottery process can be notified at the start of the specific period.

  Feature B11. The gaming machine according to any one of features B6 to B10, wherein notification of information corresponding to a result of the predetermined lottery process in the result notification unit is continued in the specific period.

  According to the feature B11, it is possible to grasp the contents of the specific period determined by the predetermined lottery process by confirming the result notification means at an arbitrary timing of the specific period.

Feature B12. Variable pitching means (distribution winning device 36) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state (function for executing the distribution start process and the distribution process in the main MPU 92); ,
With
The specific period is a period during which the variable entry control is executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B11, wherein the bonus granting opportunity is generated by a gaming ball that has entered the variable pitching means.

  According to the feature B12, even when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a bonus is not given to the player unless a bonus grant opportunity is generated by the game ball. As a result, when the variable entry control of the variable entry means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable entry means, but also the game that entered the variable entry means. It is expected that a privilege grant opportunity will be generated by the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation becomes stepwise, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B12, any one of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F3, and the features G1 Multiple configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Based on the fact that a privilege grant opportunity (detection of a game ball in the V winning detection sensor 69) is generated by a player's game operation in a specific period (distribution execution mode), the player is rewarded (transition to the opening / closing execution mode). Privilege granting means (function to execute the process of step S1311 in the main MPU 92),
Predetermined operation control means (step S905, step S1001, step S1101, step S1201, step S1302 in the main MPU 92) for controlling the predetermined operation means (distribution display unit 42c) so that the predetermined unit operation is executed in the specific period and The function of executing the process of step S1306),
With
The predetermined operation control means is a mode determination means (processing of steps S1302 and S1306 in the main MPU 92) that changes the execution mode of the predetermined unit operation depending on whether or not the privilege grant opportunity has occurred in the specific period. A game machine characterized by having a function of

  According to the feature C1, when a privilege is granted based on the occurrence of a privilege grant opportunity during a specific period, the player performs a game operation while expecting a privilege grant opportunity to occur during the specific period. Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, when the predetermined unit operation is performed by the predetermined operation unit in the specific period, it is possible to grasp whether or not it is the specific period by checking the predetermined operation unit. In addition, in a configuration in which a case where a privilege is granted or a case where a privilege is not granted is given depending on whether or not a privilege grant opportunity occurs in a specific period, a predetermined value is set depending on whether or not a privilege grant opportunity occurs in a specific period The execution mode of the unit operation changes. Thereby, it is possible to cause the predetermined unit operation to function not only as an operation for notifying the specific period but also as an operation for notifying whether or not a privilege grant opportunity has occurred during the specific period.

Feature C2. First control means (main MPU 92) for controlling the progress of the game;
Second control means (sound light side MPU 103, display side MPU 113) for executing processing for controlling execution of the effect in the specific effect means based on the information transmitted by the first control means;
With
The first control means includes
Based on the fact that a privilege grant opportunity (detection of a game ball in the V winning detection sensor 69) is generated by a player's game operation in a specific period (distribution execution mode), the player is rewarded (transition to the opening / closing execution mode). Privilege granting means (function to execute the process of step S1311 in the main MPU 92),
Predetermined operation control means (step S905, step S1001, step S1101, step S1201, step S1302 in the main MPU 92) for controlling the predetermined operation means (distribution display unit 42c) so that the predetermined unit operation is executed in the specific period and The function of executing the process of step S1306),
With
The predetermined operation control means is a mode determination means (processing of steps S1302 and S1306 in the main MPU 92) that changes the execution mode of the predetermined unit operation depending on whether or not the privilege grant opportunity has occurred in the specific period. A game machine characterized by having a function of

  According to the feature C2, when a privilege is granted based on the occurrence of a privilege grant opportunity during a specific period, the player performs a game operation while expecting a privilege grant opportunity to occur during the specific period; Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, when the predetermined unit operation is performed by the predetermined operation unit in the specific period, it is possible to grasp whether or not it is the specific period by checking the predetermined operation unit. In addition, in a configuration in which a case where a privilege is granted or a case where a privilege is not granted is given depending on whether or not a privilege grant opportunity occurs in a specific period, a predetermined value is set depending on whether or not a privilege grant opportunity occurs in a specific period The execution mode of the unit operation changes. This makes it possible to cause the predetermined unit operation to function not only as an operation for notifying the specific period but also as an operation for notifying whether or not a privilege granting opportunity has occurred during the specific period.

  Further, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing not only the first control means but also the second control means for executing the process for controlling the execution of the effect, the predetermined operation means is the second control means. Instead, it is directly controlled by the first control means. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve the reliability of the content in the predetermined operation means.

  Feature C3. The game machine according to the feature C1 or C2, wherein the mode determination unit causes the content of the notification result when the predetermined unit operation is terminated to correspond to the presence / absence of the privilege granting opportunity during the specific period. .

  According to the feature C3, it is possible to grasp whether or not a privilege grant opportunity has occurred in a specific period by confirming the notification result when the predetermined unit operation ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the confirmation timing easy to understand when confirming whether or not a privilege grant opportunity has occurred based on the content of the predetermined operation means.

Feature C4. Even if the privilege grant opportunity occurs, the specific period is continued until an end condition is satisfied,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the predetermined operation control means ends the predetermined unit operation when the specific period ends.

  According to the feature C4, even if a privilege grant opportunity occurs, the specific period is continued, so that the period during which the specific period is executed does not fluctuate according to the occurrence timing of the privilege grant opportunity. It becomes possible. In addition, since the predetermined unit operation ends when the specific period ends, it is possible to grasp the end timing of the specific period by confirming the predetermined operation means.

Feature C5. The aspect determining means causes the content of the notification result when the predetermined unit operation is terminated to correspond to the presence or absence of occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity in the specific period,
The gaming machine includes notification execution means (display-side MPU 113) for executing notification corresponding to occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity when the privilege granting trigger occurs during the specific period. The gaming machine according to Feature C4, characterized by:

  According to the feature C5, it is possible to grasp whether or not a privilege grant opportunity has occurred in the specific period by confirming the notification result when the predetermined unit operation ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the confirmation timing easy to understand when confirming whether or not a privilege grant opportunity has occurred based on the content of the predetermined operation means. On the other hand, when a privilege grant opportunity occurs during a specific period, a corresponding notification is executed, so that the player can easily understand that a privilege grant opportunity has occurred.

Feature C6. Means (step S1104 in the main MPU 92) for starting the specific period when a predetermined opportunity (winning to the distribution through winning section 35) occurs in the predetermined effective period (winning effective period of the distributing through winning section 35) ~ Function of executing the process of step S1107),
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the predetermined operation control means starts the predetermined unit operation when the predetermined effective period is started.

  According to the feature C6, it is possible to notify that the predetermined effective period is using the predetermined unit operation.

Feature C7. When a specific lottery opportunity (winning to the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33) occurs, the specific period or a period during which the specific period can be started (of the distribution through winning unit 35) Specific lottery means for executing a specific lottery process for determining whether or not to generate a winning validity period (a function for executing the processes of steps S301 and S403 in the main MPU 92);
Specific operation control means for controlling the specific operation means (special drawing display unit 42a) so as to have the operation content corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process when the specific unit operation is started and the specific unit operation is ended. The function of executing the processing of step S412, step S803 and step S804 in the main MPU 92);
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, comprising:

  According to the feature C7, an operation unit for notifying that the specific lottery process has been executed and the lottery result of the specific lottery process, and an operation unit for notifying that the specific period and the occurrence of a privilege granting event have occurred. Are individually provided as the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means. Accordingly, it is possible to individually monitor each period by confirming the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means.

  Feature C8. When the specific lottery process is executed, the specific unit effect is started, and when the specific period is subsequently executed, the specific effect means (symbol display device) so that the specific unit effect is continued in the specific period. 44) The gaming machine according to Feature C7, further comprising means for controlling (display-side MPU 113).

  According to the feature C8, it is possible to enhance the production effect in these periods by executing a series of productions including the specific period before the start of the specific period and the specific period. Further, in the configuration in which a series of effects including the specific period is executed by the specific effect means before the start of the specific period, monitoring of each period is individually performed by confirming the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means. Can be done.

Feature C9. Variable pitching means (distribution winning device 36) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state (function for executing the distribution start process and the distribution process in the main MPU 92); ,
With
The specific period is a period during which the variable entry control is executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the bonus granting opportunity is generated by a gaming ball that has entered the variable pitching means.

  According to the feature C9, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a bonus is not given to the player unless a bonus grant opportunity is generated by the game ball. As a result, when the variable entry control of the variable entry means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable entry means, but also the game that entered the variable entry means. It is expected that a privilege grant opportunity will be generated by the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation becomes stepwise, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, the configuration of the feature C1 or the feature C2 described above is provided, and the specific unit operation is executed by the specific operation means in the specific period, so that it is clear that the specific period and the privilege grant opportunity have occurred. It becomes possible to grasp.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C9, any one of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F3, and the features G1 Multiple configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Based on the fact that a privilege grant opportunity (detection of a game ball in the V winning detection sensor 69) is generated by a player's game operation in a specific period (distribution execution mode), the player is rewarded (transition to the opening / closing execution mode). Provided with a privilege granting means (function to execute the process of step S1311 in the main MPU 92),
As the specific period, at least a first specific period (first distribution execution mode) and a second specific period (second distribution execution mode) are set such that the degree of expectation that the privilege grant opportunity occurs is different. And
The privilege granting unit varies the privilege grant mode depending on whether the privilege grant opportunity occurs in the first specific period and when the privilege grant trigger occurs in the second specific period. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D1, when a privilege is granted based on the occurrence of a privilege grant opportunity during a specific period, the player performs a game operation while expecting a privilege grant opportunity to occur during the specific period. Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, as the specific period, there are a first specific period and a second specific period so that the degree of expectation that a privilege grant opportunity occurs is different. As a result, the specific period is diversified in relation to the expected degree of occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity, and from this point, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, a privilege granting mode is different between a case where a privilege grant opportunity occurs in the first specific period and a case where a privilege grant opportunity occurs in the second specific period. Thereby, not only the expectation degree of occurrence of a privilege granting opportunity is different between the first specific period and the second specific period, but also it is possible to change the manner of granting a privilege that is given when a privilege granting opportunity occurs. The difference between the first specific period and the second specific period can be clarified.

Feature D2. Based on the occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity, a specific game state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the predetermined variable pitching means (special prize winning device 37) is in an open state thereafter occurs as the granting of the privilege. ,
The privilege granting means is minimum until the specific gaming state is ended when the privilege grant opportunity occurs in the first specific period and when the privilege grant opportunity occurs in the second specific period. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the time required is different.

  According to the feature D2, the minimum time required for the specific gaming state to end is different between when the privilege granting opportunity occurs in the first specific period and when the privilege granting trigger occurs in the second specific period. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish both in the appearance of the game operation content.

Feature D3. Means (payout device 86, payout control device 87) for giving an object to be given, which is either a game ball or usable game ball number information, when a game ball enters the predetermined variable ball entry means Prepared,
The privilege granting means is fired in the specific game state due to occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity in the first specific period and the specific game state due to occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity in the second specific period. The feature D2 is characterized in that the number of grants of the grant target expected in the specific gaming state is comparable when compared with the case where the operations are performed in the same mode. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D3, when a specific gaming state occurs, there is no advantage or disadvantage according to the type of the specific period that triggered the generation of the specific gaming state with respect to the number of grants to be granted in the specific gaming state. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature D4. The second specific period is configured to have a lower degree of expectation that the privilege grant opportunity occurs than the first specific period,
The privilege granting means is that the specific gaming state due to occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity in the second specific period is more than the specific gaming state due to occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity in the first specific period. The gaming machine according to Feature D3, characterized in that the minimum time required for completion is lengthened.

  According to the feature D4, when a privilege grant opportunity occurs despite the occurrence of the second specific period, the minimum time required for the specific game state to end becomes longer. It becomes easy for the manager of the game hall to check whether or not is genuine.

  Feature D5. The privilege granting means is that the specific gaming state due to occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity in the second specific period is more than the specific gaming state due to occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity in the first specific period. The gaming machine according to Feature D4, characterized in that the period during which the variable pitching means to be opened in the specific gaming state is maintained in the closed state is lengthened.

  According to the feature D5, the minimum time required for completing the specific game state is lengthened while not affecting the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means to be released in the specific game state. It becomes possible.

Feature D6. Variable pitching means (distribution winning device 36) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state (function for executing the distribution start process and the distribution process in the main MPU 92); ,
With
The specific period is a period during which the variable entry control is executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the bonus granting opportunity is generated by a gaming ball that has entered the variable pitching means.

  According to the feature D6, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a privilege is not given to the player unless a privilege grant opportunity is generated by the game ball. As a result, when the variable entry control of the variable entry means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable entry means, but also the game that entered the variable entry means. It is expected that a privilege grant opportunity will be generated by the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation becomes stepwise, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D6, any one of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F3, and the features G1 Multiple configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. First lottery means for executing the first lottery process (function for executing the process of step S1904 in the main MPU 92);
Second lottery means for executing the second lottery process (a function for executing the process of step S1803 in the main MPU 92, a function for executing the process of step S2902 in the main MPU 92);
Both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process are those probabilities in a predetermined situation (a situation in which a probability corresponding to the low probability result is set) Probability variation means capable of generating a situation with a different probability (in the fourth embodiment, the fifth embodiment and the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the game state transition process in the main MPU 92, the first In the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the first game state transition process and the second game state transition process in the main MPU 92),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process may vary, and the probability of a specific lottery result in the second lottery process may vary. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the execution mode of each lottery process. Further, both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process may be different from the case of the predetermined situation. As a result, it is possible to cause a situation in which the execution modes of both the first lottery process and the second lottery process are fluctuating at the same time, and the contents of the game progressing through the results of the first lottery process and the second lottery process. Can be greatly different. Therefore, the equalization of the game is suppressed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature E2. Predetermined privilege giving means for giving a predetermined privilege to a player based on the result of the specific lottery in the second lottery process after the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process (the process of step S2008 in the main MPU 92) The gaming machine according to Feature E1, further comprising:

  According to the feature E2, in order to be given a predetermined privilege, it is necessary to obtain a predetermined lottery result in at least the first lottery process and a specific lottery result in the second lottery process. Therefore, a plurality of lottery processes targeted by a player who expects to receive a predetermined privilege are provided, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the probability that the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process are integrated affects the probability of granting the predetermined privilege. In this case, the configuration of the feature E1 is provided, and both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process may be different from those in the predetermined situation. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the provision probability of a predetermined privilege compared to the configuration in which only one of the probability of the first lottery process and the probability of the second lottery process varies. In addition, it is possible to greatly vary the probability of granting the predetermined privilege without greatly changing the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process.

  The configuration of the feature E2 may be configured such that the trigger for executing the second lottery process occurs only when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the first lottery process. In this case, it is necessary to obtain a specific lottery result in the second lottery process in order to be granted a predetermined privilege, and it is necessary to obtain a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process in order to execute the second lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the first lottery process.

  Feature E3. The feature E1 or E2 characterized in that at least one of the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process exists in three or more types. Game machines.

  According to the feature E3, the probability of each lottery process is determined by the fact that at least one of the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process exists. It is possible to diversify, and it is also possible to diversify the synthesis probability of these lottery processes.

  Feature E4. The probability changing means includes a predetermined lottery result in a plurality of types of lottery processes including a probability that the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the first lottery process and a probability that the specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the probability is changed so that an increase with respect to the combination probability in the predetermined situation in the combination probability of the probability becomes a predetermined increase.

  According to the feature E4, in the configuration in which both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process vary, the predetermined lottery process including them It is possible to prevent the combined probability of the probability of the lottery result from becoming extremely higher than in the predetermined situation.

  Feature E5. The probability changing means determines a target probability that is one of a probability that becomes the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and a probability that becomes the specific lottery result in the second lottery process in the plurality of types of lottery processes. Correction means for correcting according to the probability of the lottery process (in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing step S2307 in the main MPU 92; in the sixth embodiment, the processes of steps S2505 and S2605 in the main MPU 92; The gaming machine according to Feature E4, further comprising a function to be executed, a function to execute the processing of Step S2708 and Step S2808 in the main MPU 92 in the seventh embodiment.

  According to the feature E5, the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process are individually determined by correcting the target probability according to the probability of the other lottery process. Even if it is a structure which fluctuates in this way, it is possible to increase the amount of increase of the combination probability with respect to the combination probability in a predetermined situation to a predetermined increase amount.

  Feature E6. The probability varying means varies both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process when a predetermined variation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5.

  According to the feature E6, it is possible to cause a situation in which the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process fluctuate together.

Feature E7. The probability varying means is
First variation means (a function of executing the first game state transition process in the main MPU 92) for varying the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process based on the occurrence of the first opportunity;
A second changing means (function for executing the second game state transition process in the main MPU 92) for changing the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process based on the occurrence of the second opportunity;
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, comprising:

  According to the feature E7, a situation in which the probability of being a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and a situation in which the probability of being a specific lottery result in the second lottery process are individually generated. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the setting mode of each probability.

Feature E8. The gaming machine according to Feature E7, comprising at least one of the following configuration (1) and the following configuration (2).
(1) In the first variation means, the first trigger is generated a predetermined number of times that the probability that the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process is or may be different from the probability in the predetermined situation. (A function of executing the processing of step S2701 and step S2711 in the main MPU 92).
(2) In the second variation means, the second trigger occurs a specific number of times that the probability that the result of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process is or may be different from the probability in the predetermined situation. (A function for executing the processing of step S2801 and step S2811 in the main MPU 92).

  According to feature E8, a situation in which at least one of a probability of a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and a probability of a specific lottery result in the second lottery process is different from the probability in the predetermined situation is continued to some extent. Is possible. As a result, it is possible to continue the situation where the probability varies to some extent.

  The feature E8 may include a means for changing the predetermined number of times or a means for changing the specific number of times. In this case, it is possible to diversify the continuation mode of the situation where the probability varies.

Feature E9. The first varying means continues until the first trigger occurs a predetermined number of times that the probability that the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process is or may be different from the probability in the predetermined situation. Means (function to execute the processing of step S2701 and step S2711 in the main MPU 92),
The second changing means continues a situation in which the probability that the result of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process is or may be different from the probability in the predetermined situation until the second opportunity occurs a specific number of times. Means (function to execute the processing of step S2801 and step S2811 in the main MPU 92),
The gaming machine according to Feature E7, wherein the predetermined number of times and the specific number of times are different or can be different.

  According to the feature E9, it is possible to continue to some extent the situation in which the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process are different from the probabilities in the predetermined situation. . As a result, it is possible to continue the situation where the probability varies to some extent. In addition, because the predetermined number of times and the specific number of times may be different or different, the duration of the situation in which the probability varies for one of the first lottery process and the second lottery process has ended. Regardless, the situation in which the probability varies for the other can be continued. Therefore, it becomes possible to diversify the variation mode of each probability, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature E10. The probability changing means has a probability of becoming the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and a probability of being the specific lottery result in the second lottery process than the probability of the corresponding lottery process in the predetermined situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, characterized in that a situation can be caused that becomes higher and lower than the probability of the corresponding lottery process in the predetermined situation.

  According to the feature E10, one of the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process is advantageous over the predetermined situation and the other is disadvantageous than the predetermined situation. Can be generated. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the setting mode of each probability.

  Feature E11. Notification that one of the probabilities of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process is executed and the notification corresponding to the other is not executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, further comprising means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2204, S2208, and S2211 in the main MPU 92, and the sound light MPU 103).

  According to the feature E11, while the notification corresponding to one of the probabilities is executed, the notification corresponding to the other is not executed, so that one part of the lottery probability that is to confirm the notification content is grasped. It is possible to create a situation in which the lottery probability of the part is predicted. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the way of paying attention to the game in relation to each lottery probability, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E12. First lottery means for executing the first lottery process (function for executing the process of step S1904 in the main MPU 92);
Second lottery means for executing the second lottery process (a function for executing the process of step S1803 in the main MPU 92, a function for executing the process of step S2902 in the main MPU 92);
Both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process are those probabilities in a predetermined situation (a situation in which a probability corresponding to the low probability result is set) Probability variation means capable of generating a situation with a different probability (in the fourth embodiment, the fifth embodiment and the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the game state transition process in the main MPU 92, the first In the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the first game state transition process and the second game state transition process in the main MPU 92),
Predetermined privilege granting means for giving a predetermined privilege to the player based on the result of the specific lottery in the second lottery process after the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process (the process of step S2008 in the main MPU 92) Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E12, the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process may vary, and the probability of a specific lottery result in the second lottery process may vary. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the execution mode of each lottery process. Further, both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process may be different from the case of the predetermined situation. As a result, it is possible to cause a situation in which the execution modes of both the first lottery process and the second lottery process are fluctuating at the same time, and the contents of the game progressing through the results of the first lottery process and the second lottery process. Can be greatly different. Therefore, the equalization of the game is suppressed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in order to be given a predetermined privilege, it is necessary to obtain at least a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and a specific lottery result in the second lottery process. Therefore, a plurality of lottery processes targeted by a player who expects to receive a predetermined privilege are provided, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the probability that the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process are integrated affects the probability of granting the predetermined privilege. In this case, both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process may be different from those in the predetermined situation. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the provision probability of a predetermined privilege compared to the configuration in which only one of the probability of the first lottery process and the probability of the second lottery process varies. In addition, it is possible to greatly vary the probability of granting the predetermined privilege without greatly changing the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process.

  In the configuration of the feature E12, the second lottery process may be triggered only when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the first lottery process. In this case, it is necessary to obtain a specific lottery result in the second lottery process in order to be granted a predetermined privilege, and it is necessary to obtain a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process in order to execute the second lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the first lottery process.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E12, any one of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F3, and the features G1 Multiple configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Special lottery means for executing the special lottery process (a function for executing the success / failure determination process or the distribution determination process in the main MPU 92);
In the special lottery process, the probability variation means that can generate a situation in which the probability of the special lottery result is different from the predetermined situation (the process of steps S2705 to S2708 or S2805 to S2808 in the main MPU 92). Function to execute)
A return means for returning the probability of the special lottery result in the special lottery process to the probability in the predetermined situation when the return condition is satisfied (function to execute the process of step S2712 or step S2812 in the main MPU 92);
With
A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of types of return conditions exist.

  According to the feature F1, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the probability of the special lottery result in the special lottery process returns to the probability in a predetermined situation. Thereby, for example, if the probability that the result of the special lottery result is a probability that is more advantageous than the predetermined situation, the player expects that the return condition is difficult to return to the predetermined situation. If the situation has a probability that is less disadvantageous than the predetermined situation, the player expects that the return condition is easy to return to the predetermined situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature F2. If the probability change means sets the probability of the special lottery result in the special lottery process to a probability different from the predetermined situation, and the special condition occurs in a situation where the return condition is not satisfied, the special lottery The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the resulting probability can be varied.

  According to the feature F2, since the probability can change even in a situation where the return condition for returning the probability of the special lottery result to the probability in the predetermined situation is not satisfied, the setting mode of the probability is diversified, It is possible to improve the interest of games.

Feature F3. The probability changing means can generate a situation in which a probability that is a special lottery result in the special lottery process is different from a predetermined situation when a special opportunity occurs, and in the special lottery process, The situation in which the probability of the special lottery result is different from the probability in the predetermined situation, or the situation that can be, is continued until the special opportunity occurs a special number of times,
The return condition is established as at least one condition that the special opportunity has occurred the special number of times,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein a plurality of types of the special times are present.

  According to the feature F3, it is possible to diversify the continuation mode of the situation in which the probability of the special lottery result varies from the probability in the predetermined situation. In this case, for example, if the probability of the special lottery result is more advantageous than the predetermined situation, the player expects that the number of times that the situation where the probability fluctuates continues for a long time is selected. If the probability of the lottery result is more disadvantageous than the predetermined situation, the player expects to select the number of times that the situation in which the probability is changing does not continue so much. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F3, any one of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F3, and the features G1 Multiple configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Special lottery means for executing the special lottery process (a function for executing the success / failure determination process or the distribution determination process in the main MPU 92);
Selection means for selecting the probability of the special lottery result in the special lottery process from among three or more probabilities (in the fourth embodiment, the fifth embodiment, and the eighth embodiment, the game state transition in the main MPU 92) A function of executing a process, a function of executing a first game state transition process and a second game state transition process in the main MPU 92 in the sixth and seventh embodiments),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature G1, since there are three or more types of probabilities resulting in the special lottery result, it becomes possible to diversify the setting modes of the probabilities, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the feature G1, any one or more of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F3, and the features G1 are used. A configuration may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, the feature E group, the feature F group, and the feature G group, the following problems can be solved. It is.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, with regard to the pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the entrance part provided in the game area, and the display of the display device displays a variation of the pattern. A configuration is known in which when a winning result is obtained, a combination of specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and the game state is shifted to a special game state advantageous to the player. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 32 ... 1st action | operation part, 33 ... 2nd action part, 35 ... Distribution through prize winning part, 36 ... Distribution prize winning device, 37 ... Special electric prize winning device, 42a ... Special figure display part, 42c ... Distribution display unit, 44 ... symbol display device, 69 ... V winning detection sensor, 86 ... payout device, 87 ... payout control device, 92 ... main side MPU, 103 ... sound light side MPU, 113 ... display side MPU.

Claims (2)

A variable pitching means capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for performing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player, based on the fact that a privilege granting opportunity has occurred due to a game ball entering the variable pitching means;
A predetermined lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on a game ball entering a predetermined pitching portion;
First state setting means for setting the state in which the variable pitch control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a specific result;
Second state setting means for setting the state in which the variable pitch control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result;
With
When the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the specific result, the privilege grant opportunity may occur, or when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the specific result, the result of the predetermined lottery process is It is a configuration in which the privilege grant opportunity is more likely to occur than in the case of a non-specific result,
The predetermined lottery process is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined entrance part during a predetermined effective period , and even if the game ball enters the predetermined entrance part during a period different from the predetermined effective period, A gaming machine, wherein a predetermined lottery process is not executed. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

Images